THE LIBRARY 
 
 OF 
 
 THE UNIVERSITY 
 
 OF CALIFORNIA 
 
 RIVERSIDE
 
 7?
 
 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING

 
 i 
 
 LIBRARY^ 
 BOOKBINDING 
 
 BY ARTHUR L J . BAILEY 
 
 Librarian Wilmington (Delaware) Institute Free Library 
 
 THE H. W. WILSON COMPANY 
 
 WHITE PLAINS, N. Y. ( AND NEW YORK CITY 
 
 1916
 
 J53J 
 
 Published May, 1916 
 
 Copyright, 1916 
 By THE H. W. WILSON COMPANY
 
 PREFACE 
 
 It has been the purpose of the writer in these 
 chapters on library bookbinding to set forth as 
 clearly as possible the best information relating to 
 processes, materials, routine and various other lesser 
 matters pertaining to bookbinding which must be 
 taken into consideration by librarians, or by assist- 
 ants in charge of binding departments. Although 
 much of this information exists elsewhere in printed 
 form, it is scattered through various books and arti- 
 cles. In some respects, therefore, this book is a 
 gathering together of scattered material. It is hoped, 
 however, that there is enough new material to make 
 the book of interest to those who deal daily with 
 binding problems, and that the book as a whole may 
 help to solve some of the questions relating to bind- 
 ing in libraries both large and small. 
 
 Most books on binding and all books on library 
 binding have devoted some space to paper, its com- 
 position, manufacture, finish and use. As the subject 
 is so fully dealt with elsewhere it has not been in- 
 cluded here. Those who are interested will find full 
 information in the technical books on paper, in Mr. 
 Dana's "Notes on book binding for libraries," and 
 in Messrs. Courts and Stephen's "Manual of library 
 binding." - There is also an excellent article on wood-
 
 VI PREFACE 
 
 pulp paper in the Scientific American of October 4, 
 
 Nor has it seemed desirable to include chapters 
 on commercial binding nor on historical bindings. 
 Both of these subjects are treated adequately in 
 Coutts and Stephen's "Manual." The present writer 
 has limited his discussion to matters dealing directly 
 with the binding of books for libraries. 
 
 In one or two cases the same subject has been 
 treated in two different chapters because the subject 
 matter belonged in both places, and in neither case 
 would the discussion be complete without it. 
 
 A. L. B. 
 December 9, 1915.
 
 TABLE OF CONTENTS 
 
 Chapter - I. Introduction 3 
 
 II. Selection of a binder 9 
 
 III. Processes 13 
 
 l -IV. Materials 51 
 
 V. Specifications 87 
 
 VI. Binding before purchase and rein- 
 forcing 103 
 
 VII. Cost 115 
 
 VIII. Preparing for the bindery 125 
 
 IX. Binding records and routine 149 
 
 X. Repairing, recasing, reecovering, 
 
 etc 165 
 
 XI. Magazine binders 199 
 
 XII. Pamphlets 205 
 
 XIII. Bindery in the library building. . .209 
 
 Appendix A. Specifications of the U. S. Bureau 
 
 of Standards for book cloths. . .217 
 
 B. Reading list on binding 221 
 
 C. List of technical terms 225 
 
 Index 245
 
 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING
 
 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 CHAPTER I 
 INTRODUCTION 
 
 An examination of the annual reports of libraries 
 in the United States shows that from four to eight 
 per cent of the total income is spent for binding; the 
 amounts ranging from $2,000 to over $40,000 a year 
 for this one item. It must be admitted that these are 
 large sums and that a knowledge of binding materi- 
 als and processes is necessary in order to spend this 
 money wisely. In many libraries the appropriation 
 for books includes binding and periodicals. It is 
 evident, therefore, that every dollar saved on binding 
 can be devoted to the purchase of books. And what 
 librarian does not desire more money for new books? 
 
 In spite of the importance of the subject a great 
 deal of ignorance has prevailed in years pasj:, and 
 far too many librarians of the present day fail to 
 realize that here is one place where money can be 
 easily wasted. Possibly one reason for the ignorance 
 about binding is that, except in a minor degree, it 
 does not directly affect the public, for librarians are 
 quick to make changes which will increase the inter- 
 est of the public in the library. Another reason is 
 that experiments are necessary; and since it takes
 
 4 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 time to draw conclusions from experiments, definite 
 rules have not been formulated. 
 
 In fact, experiments are still being tried. But 
 while in the past they were along the line of 
 making books stronger, the experiments of the pres- 
 ent are rather along the line of adapting different 
 methods to different books, according to the paper 
 on which they are printed, or according to the kind 
 of use they will receive. It is reasonably safe to 
 say that present methods of the best library binders 
 make a book as strong as it is possible to make it. 
 Progress no longer lies along the line of strength. 
 
 In order to administer a binding department 
 wisely, the librarian or assistant in charge of bind- 
 ing must know materials, processes, and books; and 
 especially must he know how books should be bound 
 to meet the use they are to receive. For example, 
 fiction that is very popular should be bound differ- 
 ently from fiction which must be kept on the shelves, 
 but which is not popular; it is easily apparent that 
 McCutcheon's "Graustark" should be bound differ- 
 ently from Henry James' "Golden bowl." Heavy 
 reference books constantly consulted should be bound 
 differently from reference books used only occasion- 
 ally, while it may be wise to bind magazines differ- 
 ently from either. A librarian of a reference library 
 will adopt methods differing from those which are 
 used in public libraries. A good working knowledge 
 of materials and processes can be easily obtained. 
 The saving of expense comes in applying them to 
 use. 
 
 A recent advertisement of a binder stated that
 
 INTRODUCTION 5 
 
 his books were rebound more times than the books 
 of any other binder. This statement is a sad com- 
 mentary on the serviceability of his books and calls 
 to mind a practice of twenty years ago which is too 
 prevalent even at the present time. At that time it 
 was the recognized custom to bind as cheaply as 
 possible books which circulated rapidly and wore out 
 quickly. Those who favor this custom fail to realize 
 that in the case of books which are constantly used 
 the actual cost of binding does not depend on the 
 initial cost per volume, but on the ratio of cost to 
 circulation. This is a point first brought out by 
 Mr. J. C. Dana in his "Notes on bookbinding for 
 libraries," and one on which it is impossible to lay 
 too much emphasis. A book which costs 35c. to 
 bind and which circulates 35 times has cost one cent 
 for each time it has been issued after rebinding; 
 while a book which has cost 5oc. to bind and has 
 been issued 100 times (a fair average for a 5oc. bind- 
 ing) costs one half cent for each time it has been 
 issued. Obviously the 500. binding is much cheaper. 
 It is probable that the 35c. book must either be re- 
 bound at an additional expense of 35c. or else a new 
 copy must be purchased at a cost of $i, while the 
 5oc. binding may carry the book to a point where it 
 can be discarded absolutely. Certainly it should 
 never be rebound again. It is important, therefore, 
 that the librarian who does not know what his bind- 
 ing is costing per issue should keep statistics of 
 circulation for a sufficient length of time to obtain 
 general averages which will be fairly accurate. 
 
 While a very strong binding is necessary for
 
 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 fiction and juvenile books in public libraries, it is 
 probable that on many books of a serious character 
 some of the strengthening processes which must be 
 used on fiction and juveniles may be omitted. It 
 should be noted that while this is true of public 
 libraries, the reverse would probably be true in col- 
 lege and reference libraries where a much larger 
 proportion of serious books should be bound as 
 strongly as possible. 
 
 There are three general kinds of binding : 
 
 (a) Commercial, or edition binding. 
 
 (&) Artistic binding. 
 
 (c) Library binding. 
 
 Commercial binding is that in which practically 
 all books come from the publishers. For the most 
 part it is the product of machinery from beginning 
 to end, and the material used is generally poor. 
 Apparently the sole object in view of most publish- 
 ers is to turn out a book that will attract the eye. 
 Strength is not an element for which they strive. 
 From their point of view they cannot be severely 
 blamed for making strength a secondary considera- 
 tion. By far the largest part of their product is sold 
 to individuals, and the strength of the binding is 
 adequate for the amount of use that these books will 
 receive. From the library point of view, however, 
 publishers' bindings are entirely inadequate. One 
 cannot expect, of course, that the publisher will put 
 a popular novel into a binding strong enough to 
 meet the demands of library use. On the other 
 hand, one cannot blame librarians for being exas- 
 perated when heavy books of travel, history, or
 
 INTRODUCTION 7 
 
 biography part from their covers when they have 
 been in the hands of less than ten readers. 
 
 The distinguishing characteristics of commercial 
 binding, and at the same time its greatest weak- 
 nesses, are the machine sewing and the insecure way 
 in which the book is fastened into the cover. Very 
 little extra expense either in material, care, or work- 
 manship, would make most books outside of fiction 
 sufficiently strong to withstand all the wear that 
 they will receive. Unfortunately the publishers fail 
 to realize this, and books by the thousands come 
 from the binderies c'overed on the back with the 
 coarsest kind of super which does not even extend 
 to the head or tail of the book. A stouter cloth, 
 carefully applied, running the entire length of the 
 back would cost very little more per volume, but 
 would strengthen it materially. 
 
 While practically all commercial binding is lack- 
 ing in strength, this is due almost wholly to trade 
 conditions, for commercial binding can be made 
 exceedingly strong. One has only to turn to the 
 1912 edition of the Century Dictionary or to the 
 United States Catalog, which are practically machine 
 bound throughout, to realize this fact. However, 
 until librarians are united in their demands for 
 stronger bindings, we can expect to see the present 
 poor work turned out in as large quantities as ever. 
 
 There is another .kind of binding which is, if 
 possible, even more unsuitable for libraries. This is 
 artistic binding which is done exclusively for indi- 
 viduals, beauty of appearance being the chief object 
 in view. It differs from commercial binding in being
 
 8 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 all hand work instead of machine work. Since hand 
 work is used and the main object in view is beauty, 
 it follows, of course, that such books are much 
 stronger than those bound by publishers. But the 
 strength of these books is in many cases not proof 
 against the wear that they would receive in libraries. 
 No special methods of sewing or strengthening the 
 first and last sections are used. Practically all artis- 
 tic books are bound in leather and frequently in full 
 leather. Whenever the leather used is anything 
 other than good morocco, it is an element of weak- 
 ness rather than strength. In addition to these ob- 
 jections, artistic bindings are usually so expensive as 
 to be beyond the reach of any library. 
 
 In library binding the main consideration is 
 strength. Not only is beauty a secondary considera- 
 tion, it is scarcely taken into consideration at all. 
 For it must be confessed that library bindings are 
 seldom attractive. No library can afford to pay for 
 ornamentation of backs and sides of books. Library 
 binding is all hand work. Although machine bind- 
 ing can be made exceedingly strong, machines can- 
 not be used on library binding, because the books 
 vary so much in size and lettering. The main rea- 
 son why commercial binding can be done by machin- 
 ery is because a large number of books are bound 
 exactly alike. In library binding it seldom happens 
 that more than two volumes, the same in size and 
 lettering, are bound at the same time. Library bind- 
 ing also differs from other bindings in that the use 
 the book is to receive is made the basis of selection 
 of materials and methods.
 
 CHAPTER II 
 SELECTION OF A BINDER 
 
 Since library binding differs widely from other 
 kinds of binding, it follows naturally that it is best 
 to have this work done by men who understand its 
 special requirements. Unfortunately, there are com- 
 paratively few binders who make a specialty of this 
 kind of work. Librarians of most of the smaller 
 libraries are forced by local prejudice to give their 
 work to the local binder or to the nearest outside 
 binder in order to save the expense of transporta- 
 tion. If the work is sent to the local binder, it must 
 be sent to one who is doing other kinds of binding 
 and to whom the library work is, in a way, a minor 
 consideration. He would object if the work were 
 sent out of town, but the total amount of the library 
 work is small compared with his other work. Such 
 binders usually have one way for binding all books 
 (except those which come under the head of blank- 
 book work) and the library books go through the 
 regular process of being sewed on twine and put 
 into covers with no special reinforcements. The 
 materials used are not the best and the workmanship 
 is generally poor. Local binders, realizing that the 
 funds are usually inadequate for the needs of the 
 library, frequently do this work at a price which at 
 first sight seems cheap. When, however, the poor
 
 10 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 service which the bindings give is taken into consid- 
 eration the price is really very high. Many of these 
 binders have been in business for years ; and al- 
 though they may be good workmen and do honest 
 work, they are very sure that they know more about 
 binding than any librarian, and it is with difficulty 
 that they can be prevailed upon to adopt suggestions. 
 
 It is only fair, of course, that a library which is 
 supported either in whole or in part by public funds 
 should, when possible, have its work done by resi- 
 dents of the town. For this reason, therefore, the 
 librarian should learn in just what ways good library 
 binding differs from other binding. All the good 
 materials and processes, and all the various methods 
 of strengthening a book should be studied carefully 
 so that the binder can be told exactly how the work 
 should be done. The binder will probably rebel, but 
 perhaps he can be converted and the effort is worth 
 while. 
 
 If the binder fails to grasp the ideas of the libra- 
 rian, or refuses to carry them out, the work should 
 be sent out of town to a good binder, for deference 
 to local prejudice does not require that the effi- 
 ciency of the library be impaired-. When work is 
 sent out of town the librarian is somewhat at a dis- 
 advantage, for no examination of the work can be 
 made while the books are in process. That the 
 binder chosen should do honest work goes without 
 saying. The work of a dishonest or incompetent 
 binder always shows in the poor service which the 
 books give, but inasmuch as dishonest work is gen-
 
 SELECTION OF A BINDER II 
 
 erally covered up, it takes time to discover it. 
 Therefore, great care must be taken to select a good 
 binder in the first place. Librarians who are in 
 doubt should consult the librarians of large libraries, 
 or apply to the Binding committee of the American 
 Library Association for the names of reliable binders. 
 
 While librarians should be able to give sugges- 
 tions to binders who are not accustomed to library 
 binding, and failing that should exercise good judg- 
 ment in selecting a binder at a distance, they should 
 not expect the impossible. The writer has seen books 
 sent to binders which were in such bad condition 
 that no binder could bind them satisfactorily. Some 
 librarians expect too much of a binder; others do 
 not realize that they are not demanding all that they 
 should receive- 
 
 Having selected a competent binder the librarian 
 should not insist that unimportant details be done 
 according to his own ideas. If the binder under- 
 stands that he may have the work only so long as 
 he follows the specifications faithfully, one may 
 safely leave the details to him. 
 
 It should further be borne in mind that good 
 binding is seldom obtained at low prices. A library 
 book well bound requires good material, good work- 
 manship and special reinforcements which take time. 
 Since the largest part of the cost of a book is due 
 to the labor spent on it, it follows that low prices 
 can prevail only in those localities where the cost of 
 labor is below the standard. 
 
 Since workmanship has as much to do with good
 
 12 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 binding as specifications it is not wise to submit 
 specifications to different binders for bids. It is 
 better to ask binders to submit samples of their work 
 with specifications of the way in which the books 
 are bound. If, however, it seems wise to ask for 
 bids, it is far from wise to choose the lowest bidder 
 unless absolutely assured that the workmanship and 
 material will be satisfactory.
 
 CHAPTER III 
 PROCESSES 
 
 The processes of bookbinding have been so fully 
 covered in the books of Messrs. Cockerell, Zaehns- 
 dorf, Crane, and others, that the need of further 
 material of a similar character is not readily appa- 
 rent. The only excuse the writer has to offer for 
 discussing the matter of processes at any length is 
 that there seems to exist nowhere any description of 
 the processes that are used in the best library bind- 
 eries. Mr. Dana in his "Notes on bookbinding for 
 libraries" touches only certain points of the processes 
 here and there. Mr. Stephen in Coutts and Stephen's 
 "Manual of library binding" has a chapter on hand 
 bookbinding, but confines himself closely to the gen- 
 eral processes that have been in vogue for years; the 
 modifications used in library binding are not touched 
 upon. In other words the works of Cockerell, 
 Zaehnsdorf, Crane and others are too full, while de- 
 scriptions in books devoted to library binding are not 
 full enough. 
 
 It is the purpose of this chapter to cover some- 
 what in detail the main processes as they are carried 
 out in the best library binderies. Explanations of the 
 technical terms used will be found in the list of 
 technical terms at the end of the book.
 
 14 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 Without discussing the composition of paper it is 
 necessary to state that the paper of a book has a very 
 important effect upon its binding. Its thickness, ten- 
 sile strength, firmness, toughness, strength after being 
 sawed or perforated for sewing, and strength after 
 folding, all have an effect on its durability. Espe- 
 cial emphasis must be laid upon strength after fold- 
 ing, for it must be remembered that it is through the 
 fold that the book is sewed. If a crease or a fold in 
 a piece of paper weakens that piece of paper, it will 
 be impossible to make a strong book by sewing in the 
 ordinary way. If a fold has very little effect upon the 
 strength of the paper ordinary sewing may be satis- 
 factory. The folding of paper in 95 per cent of fic- 
 tion and juvenile books weakens it at the fold over 
 50 per cent. In a good piece of paper the fold weak- 
 ens it not over 5 per cent. 
 
 The problem of paper is a modern one, due to 
 the use of wood pulp and other short-fibred materials 
 in paper manufacture. All binders complain bitterly 
 of the impossibility of binding it properly. The libra- 
 rian, however, should know the way in which it can 
 be bound to give the maximum amount of service 
 and should not allow a binder to blame the paper for 
 faults which are due to his ignorance or to poor 
 workmanship. 
 
 While the customs of library binders vary some- 
 what according to the prejudices of the different men, 
 the following description covers the binding processes 
 carried out at most binderies.
 
 PROCESSES IS 
 
 1. TAKING APART 
 
 After the books have been checked with the state- 
 ment of the librarian to see that the correct number 
 has been received, each one is taken apart carefully 
 and all old threads, glue, paste, etc., removed from 
 the back. If the book is in a regular machine sewed 
 publisher's cover it will be comparatively easy to re- 
 move old threads and glue from the back. If in an 
 old hand sewed one, it may be a little more difficult. 
 
 The book is first removed from the cover. The 
 first signature is then turned back and threads cut 
 with a sharp knife. Generally this will loosen the 
 signature so that it can be separated easily from the 
 rest of the volume. If it is still held by glue and 
 there is danger of injuring the back of the signature, 
 a bone folder is used. If the book had a tight back 
 and the leather, back-lining paper and glue form a 
 very firm back not easily separated in the manner de- 
 scribed, the glue may be softened with paste or warm 
 water, with care necessary to prevent the dampness 
 from penetrating the book. 
 
 2. COLLATION 
 
 The book should then be collated. The best 
 library binders make themselves responsible for 
 page collation but they do not bother to see that all 
 plates, illustrations, maps, etc., which may be called 
 for by the table of contents, are in proper place. In 
 the case of periodicals they do not always disc'over 
 the fact that certain parts, not included in the main
 
 16 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 paging, are missing. Their collation is that of main 
 paging only. Periodicals must, therefore, have title 
 page, table of contents and index in their proper 
 places. Books with two or more main pagings or 
 many unpaged illustrations must be collated at the 
 library. (See Preparing for the bindery, p. 132.) 
 
 3. KNOCKING DOWN 
 
 (a) Backs of signatures are then pounded down 
 so that they may be as nearly as possible the same 
 thickness as the front of the signatures. Care must 
 be taken to have a clean hammer and to let it fall 
 evenly on the paper. If the backs are not properly 
 jjounded down there is likely to be too much swell in 
 the back of the book when it is finally sewed. In all 
 the first processes of binding the question of undue 
 swelling of the back must be taken into consideration. 
 
 (6) If the book must be overcast when it comes 
 to be sewed, the back is not only pounded down at 
 this stage, but it is also put under the knife and en- 
 tirely cut off, leaving single leaves instead of folded 
 sections. If it is not pounded it cannot be cut prop- 
 erly. The success of overcasting depends largely on 
 the amount of margin at the back, so that care must 
 be taken not to cut more than is absolutely necessary. 
 
 4. MENDING 
 
 Leaves are mended with thin tough paper. The 
 librarian should not, however, expect binders to mend 
 books which have a large number of torn leaves 
 without making an extra charge.
 
 PROCESSES 17 
 
 5. GLUING 
 
 Books which are to be overcast and which have 
 had the backs cut off are slightly glued to hold the 
 leaves together. A sufficient number can then be 
 taken off and handled as a section without coming 
 apart. 
 
 6. FLY LEAVES GUARDED 
 
 Fly-leaves, made of kraft or manila paper running 
 about 60 pounds to the ream, which have previously 
 been guarded with cloth are added to the book. In 
 guarding, a strip of cloth is pasted around the back 
 of the folded fly-leaf covering about one quarter of 
 an inch on each side. When the book is sewed the 
 needle passes through the cloth as well as the paper. 
 Different binders use different materials for guard- 
 ing fly-leaves, end papers and signatures. It must, 
 however, be a cloth of close weave, strong, and light 
 in weight. The English cloth called jaconet, used by 
 some binders, is probably as satisfactory as any. 
 
 This is one part of library binding which differs 
 radically from the custom in ordinary hand work. 
 Old-fashioned binders, unless properly instructed, will 
 simply fold a piece of paper, and tip it on to the first 
 and last signatures with paste, thus forming an ele- 
 ment of weakness instead of strength. When the 
 fly-leaves are guarded and properly sewed they be- 
 come an integral part of the book and no tipping is 
 necessary. 
 
 7. SECTIONS GUARDED 
 
 At this point it is also necessary to guard the first
 
 l8 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 and last signatures of books which are to be sewed 
 in the regular way. Overcast books do not need such 
 guards. 
 
 Guarding of first and last signatures is another 
 of the distinctive features of library binding. In the 
 case of books bound in the regular fashion the sew- 
 ing invariably first gives way at the first and last sig- 
 natures. Guarding with jaconet prevents the threads 
 which lie in the middle of the signatures from pulling 
 through the paper. This method is essential if it 
 is supposed that the book will be much used. It 
 is not essential for books which will be used only 
 occasionally. 
 
 8. ILLUSTRATIONS GUARDED 
 
 Illustrations are guarded with a thin, tough paper, 
 not with cloth. The guard folds around an adjoining 
 signature and is sewed through. 
 
 9. SAWING 
 
 If the book is not to be overcast, it is screwed 
 tightly into the backing-press and sawed to make, the 
 grooves in which the bands or twines are laid when 
 the book is sewed. Grooves for three bands must 
 be made for books eight inches high, four for 
 twelve-inch books and five for fifteen-inch books. 
 For fiction two bands are used. There must also 
 be two additional grooves, much shallower than the 
 others, about one half inch from the head and tail of 
 the book for the kettlestitch. 
 
 After the grooves for kettlestitch have been sawed 
 the two grooves for bands will divide the rest of the
 
 PROCESSES 19 
 
 back into three equal parts. For fine work it is ne- 
 cessary to measure the book carefully and mark with 
 a pencil ; but in most library work measurement by 
 the eye alone is sufficient. In sawing, care must be 
 taken not to saw too deeply, since too deep a cut 
 allows the signature to play back and forth and is 
 plainly visible inside. 
 
 There are some good library binders who over- 
 cast books in the modern way, and yet who sew on 
 bands. Such binders will at this point saw all books. 
 There are also some good library binders who use no 
 bands when overcasting and who sew all other books 
 on tapes. These binders omit sawing. 
 
 10. END PAPERS ADDED 
 
 At this point it is best to add end papers. These 
 are always guarded on the outside of the fold and 
 sometimes on the inside. They should be made of 
 good, strong paper somewhat heavier than that used 
 for fly-leaves. Some binders have special papers 
 made to order with a design which serves as a trade 
 mark. End papers, in the same way as fly-leaves, are 
 prepared with guards in quantity and simply need to 
 be trimmed to the size of the book. They are not 
 added at the same time as fly-leaves because they 
 must not be sawed. If this is done the holes show 
 through after the end paper is pasted down. 
 
 11. SEWING 
 
 Regular or Bench Sewing. When the signatures 
 are ready for sewing, twines (or "bands" as they are
 
 20 
 
 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 FIGURE i. Sewing bench showing bands adjusted. 
 
 commonly called) are stretched taut on the sewing 
 bench and adjusted so that they will fit into the saw- 
 cuts in signatures. (Fig. i.) 
 
 The book is placed back of the sewing bench with 
 the fore-edge toward the sewer and with the first 
 section on top. The first section (i. e. the end paper) 
 to be sewed is then turned over, opened in the middle 
 by the left hand, and placed on the sewing bench. 
 The sewer, as she faces toward the right, with the 
 right hand passes the needle from the outside through 
 the sawcut for the kettlestitch, where it is taken by 
 the left hand along the inside of the section and 
 passed out on the near side of the first band, then in 
 again on the far side of the first band, along the in- 
 side of the section to the second band, where the 
 process is repeated ; and so on, bringing the needle
 
 PROCESSES 
 
 21 
 
 out in the far kettlestitch. (Fig. 2.) The thread is 
 pulled tight at each stitch and about two inches of 
 thread is allowed to hang from the first kettlestitch. 
 In some few cases it may be advisable to bring the 
 
 FIGURE 2. Sewing on sunken cords. Based on illustration in 
 Report of the Committee on Bookbinding. Edited for 
 Society of Arts, London, 1905.
 
 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 needle out on the far side of the band and in again 
 on the near side, thus entirely encircling the band 
 with the thread. The next section (i. e. the fly- 
 leaves) is then laid on and the process repeated, ex- 
 cept that the sewing proceeds from the far end to 
 the near end. When the thread is brought out of the 
 
 i_ 
 
 FIGURE 3. Kettle stitch. 
 
 kettle stitch of the second section the end of the 
 thread left projecting from the first section is securely 
 tied to it, and the sewer proceeds with the third sec- 
 tion This will be the first signature of the book. On 
 reaching the last sawcut at the far end in the third 
 section the needle is put between the second and first 
 sections carrying the thread down in such a way as 
 to form a buttonhole stitch. (Fig. 3.) 
 
 All other signatures are sewed in the same way, 
 the last section sewed being securely fastened to the 
 others. It is possible to sew a number of books one 
 after another without removing them from the sew- 
 ing-bench. If the back swells unduly the sections can 
 be pounded down with a piece of wood, care being 
 taken not to drive them inward The sewing should 
 be neither too loose nor too tight. If too loose a firm, 
 compact book cannot be made; if too tight the
 
 PROCESSES 23 
 
 threads may break in the process of backing. Bands 
 are allowed to project about an inch on each side of 
 the book. 
 
 Formerly it was the practice of some binders to 
 sew in a way technically called "two-on." This 
 simply means that the sewer when reaching the 
 middle of the signature, passes the needle into the 
 corresponding sawcut of the signature above and 
 sews through to the other end. This always leaves 
 an end of a signature unsewed. This way of sewing 
 is permissible on books which have a large number 
 of thin signatures, in order to prevent the thread 
 from unduly swelling the back. It is never permis- 
 sible on other books. 
 
 The foregoing account gives a very brief descrip- 
 tion of ordinary sewing. It is easily understood 
 when once seen. Librarians who have charge of 
 binding should keep the process thoroughly in mind 
 for it is the most important single process in the 
 making of a book. Such sewing will be used on a 
 large number of books which have to be rebound, but 
 a still larger number, practically all fiction and juve- 
 nile books, should be sewed in a different manner; 
 that is, with some kind of an overcast stitch. 
 
 Overcasting. The modern overcasting stitch re- 
 sembles in principle the old-fashioned whipstitching, 
 but differs radically in actual performance. It is 
 exceedingly strong, while the old-fashioned whip- 
 stitching is not. It has been objected that modern 
 overcasting takes away much of the flexibility of a 
 book and that books once sewed in this way can never
 
 24 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 be rebound. It is true that an oversewed book is not 
 as flexible as one sewed through the signatures, yet 
 most of them are more flexible than one might sup- 
 pose. It is also true that the book can never be re- 
 bound, but if the overcasting is properly done, the 
 sewing will last until the book is discarded. It is for 
 this reason that it is used on practically all fiction and 
 juvenile books. 
 
 According to the old-fashioned method of whip- 
 stitching it was the custom to cut off the backs of 
 signatures, glue them slightly, take a few leaves and 
 sew them over and over making five or six stitches 
 to a section, as shown in Figure 4. The next section 
 was then sewed in the same way, but it was not 
 joined in any way to the section beneath except by 
 the kettlestitch and occasionally by a little paste. 
 When sewed in this way the leaves inside of each 
 arbitrary section would open only as far back as the 
 
 FIGURE 4. Old-fashioned whipstitching, 
 sewed separately. 
 
 Each section is
 
 PROCESSES 25 
 
 threads of the stitches, while between the sections the 
 book would open to the back of the section. If paste 
 had been used the strain of opening tended to pull the 
 leaves apart. If the book was subjected to hard wear 
 the thread cut into the paper. 
 
 Today every progressive library binder has a 
 special method of overcasting arid each claims that 
 his method is the best. Librarians, however, can see 
 many points of resemblance between them, and few 
 points of difference. In actual wearing qualities the 
 sewing of one seems as good as that of another. 
 When properly done the sewing prescribed by all of 
 the methods is still in good condition when the books 
 have to be withdrawn from circulation,. 
 
 In overcasting, as in old-fashioned whipstitching, 
 the sewer selects a certain number of sheets for sew- 
 ing. Bands are placed on the sewing-bench as in 
 regular sewing, though some binders claim that it 
 is not necessary to sew either on bands or tapes. 
 The sections are first perforated by a machine to 
 facilitate the work of the sewer and to insure that all 
 stitches shall be equidistant from the back of the 
 book. So far as is known no machine for this pur- 
 pose is on the market. It is certain, however, that 
 the best binders have machines for this purpose. 
 They have either designed their own machines or 
 have adapted those made for other purposes. If the 
 book is printed on thick, spongy paper it will increase 
 flexibility if the paper is creased along the line of 
 perforation. 
 
 It is difficult to give a description of modern
 
 FIGURE 5. One kind of modern overcast stitch. There are 
 others equally good. Note that each stitch extends 
 through two sections. 
 
 overcasting which can be easily understood by one 
 unfamiliar with sewing processes. The reader will 
 be helped by looking closely at Figure 5 while read- 
 ing the following description, but one can understand 
 it best by seeing it done or by tearing a book apart 
 and examining the sewing. 
 
 The first section of the book is sewed over and 
 over in the same way as in the old-fashioned method 
 of whipstitching, except that a great many more 
 stitches are taken. The second section, when placed 
 on the first, is also sewed over and over but a certain 
 number of stitches are also made which connect the 
 second section with the first. In the same way the 
 third section is sewed to the second and so on through 
 the book, so that when the book is finally sewed it is 
 tight and compact; its weakness lies in the paper it- 
 self, not in the sewing. Some binders add three
 
 PROCESSES 
 
 kettlestitches at the end of the book instead of one, 
 believing that when all kettlestitches are placed in one 
 saw-cut the swell at the head and tail of the book is 
 too great. 
 
 Overcasting is the most expensive way of sewing 
 a book, so that it is advantageous to binders to place 
 as large a number of leaves as possible in a section. 
 
 OVERSEWING 
 
 ORDINARY METHOD 
 OF SEWING THROUGH 
 
 FIGURE 6. From "About Public Library Books and Their 
 Binding" by Cedric Chivers.
 
 28 
 
 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 FIGURE 7. Sewing on tapes. Sawcuts made only for kettle 
 stitches. Based on illustration in Report of the Commit- 
 tee on Leather for Bookbinding. Edited for Society of 
 Arts, London, 1905. 
 
 The more careful binders, however, regulate the num- 
 ber of leaves in a section according to the kind of 
 paper in the book. A larger number of leaves can
 
 PROCESSES 
 
 29 
 
 FIGURE 8. Stitching. 
 
 be taken in books printed on thin paper than in those 
 printed on thick, spongy or heavy papers. 
 
 In deciding how a book ought to be sewed one 
 must consider: (a) The use the book is to receive. 
 If it will not receive hard usage sew through the sig-
 
 30 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 natures; otherwise overcast. (6) Paper on which 
 the book is printed. Poor paper should be over- 
 sewed. (Fig. 6.) 
 
 Tapes. When it does not seem necessary to over- 
 cast it may be advantageous to sew on tapes instead 
 of bands. This method eliminates saw-cuts since the 
 narrow tapes are simply laid against the back of the 
 book and the needle passed around them, as indicated 
 in Figure 7. Sewing on tapes makes a book much 
 more flexible than it can be made any other way ex- 
 cept by sewing on raised bands. Music should always 
 be sewed in this way. Until recently it was supposed 
 that tapes added strength, but it is certain that they 
 do not if the book is properly bound in other respects. 
 If used at all, tapes should be narrow. Wide ones 
 take up a great deal of surface and when glue is ap- 
 plied this surface remains untouched, unless the sewer 
 has sewed through them instead of around them. 
 
 Stitching. Stitching is the process of sewing 
 loose leaves lengthwise on a sewing machine, after 
 which the stitched sections are sewed in the regular 
 way on bands. (Fig. 8.) The objection made to 
 old-fashioned whipstitching, that between the sections 
 the book opens all the way to the back while inside 
 the section it opens only as far as the threads, is 
 equally applicable to a stitched book. Any one who 
 has read a book sewed in this way will remember how 
 difficult it was to hold in the hands. Stitching makes 
 a stronger book than the old-fashioned whipstitching 
 but cannot compare in strength with the modern 
 overcasting. In some few cases it may be used ad-
 
 PROCESSES 31 
 
 vantageously on the first and last signatures of a 
 book, but its use on the entire book cannot be too 
 strongly condemned. 
 
 It may be inferred by what has been said about 
 sewing that it is a comparatively simple matter to sew 
 books properly. It is right at this point, however, 
 that the librarian and the binder who does not under- 
 stand the requirements of library work will come into 
 conflict. The binder will insist that all books must be 
 sewed on bands. When the backs of sections are 
 very badly worn he will agree to whipstitch, but will 
 use the old method. The librarian will insist not only 
 that nine-tenths of fiction and juvenile books must be 
 overcast, but that a special kind of overcasting must 
 be used. The binders who make a specialty of library 
 work do all this as a matter of course. At least one 
 binder tests the thickness, tensile strength and other 
 qualities of the paper and sews each book in the way 
 that experience has shown to be the best. 
 
 FORWARDING 
 
 After the book is sewed it goes to the forwarder 
 who has charge of the book during all processes 
 which the book passes through between sewing and 
 finishing. Forwarding includes trimming, gluing, 
 rounding, backing, putting on back-lining, making 
 the case (or lacing-in, see page 42), casing-in, 
 pressing. 
 
 12. FLY LEAVES PASTED 
 
 The end papers and fly-leaves which lie together 
 are pasted together, making one thick fly-leaf. When
 
 32 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 it is remembered that both end papers and fly-leaves 
 are guarded with cloth, it will be seen that pasting 
 the two together adds materially to the strength of 
 the book. 
 
 13. BANDS FRAYED 
 
 The bands which project about an inch and a half 
 on each side of the book are frayed out at the end and 
 pasted to the end papers. The fraying is done so that 
 they will paste down flat, and the pasting so that they 
 will be out of the way during succeeding processes. 
 
 14. TRIMMING 
 
 The book is squared up by tapping on a flat sur- 
 face, and trimmed at the head, fore-edge and tail. As 
 little as possible must be trimmed, but binders find 
 that if less than an eighth of an inch is cut the cutting 
 machine does not work well. Trimming makes the 
 edges even and what is more important in rebound 
 books, removes much dirt. 
 
 15. SPRINKLING 
 
 At this point edges are sprinkled. This process 
 is not essential either for strength or beauty, but it 
 helps to keep the book from becoming soiled, or at 
 least from showing dirt. It cannot be expected on 
 cheap work. The process was formerly done by 
 hand, using a brush and shaking the coloring matter 
 on the book. It can now be done with a machine 
 operated by hand which sprays the coloring matter 
 on the book. Occasionally the top of the book is bur- 
 nished with an agate or blood stone.
 
 PROCESSES _ 3 
 
 Occasionally also it may be desirable to gild the 
 top of a book which is being rebound. When this 
 occurs it is not a process to which the librarian need 
 give much attention, except to be sure that good gold 
 is used. 
 
 1 6. GLUING 
 
 The back of the book is then slightly glued. The 
 glue must be very hot and quite thin, and must be 
 thoroughly worked into the back. By placing books 
 in a pile a number can be done at a time, 
 
 17. ROUNDING 
 
 As soon as the glue has stiffened but before it is 
 hard the book is rounded. This must be done by ex- 
 perts and is a process which must be seen to be 
 understood. The book is -placed on the table with the 
 fore edge toward the workman who then hammers 
 the part of the back lying uppermostjn such a way as 
 to force the upper part of the book toward the work- 
 man. The book is then turned over and the process 
 repeated. After a few operations like this the back 
 of the book becomes rounded and the fore edge 
 concave. 
 
 18. BACKING 
 
 The book is then placed in a backing press allow- 
 ing about an eight of an inch to project, and screwed 
 very tight. With a backing hammer the rounding 
 process is continued and the sides of the book forced 
 down over the edge of the press to form a projection 
 against which the edge of the board for the side rests, 
 forming the joint. In hammering, the workman be-
 
 34 
 
 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 gins at the proper distance from the center of the 
 back so that he can force the backs of the other sig- 
 natures over on each side toward the edge. (Fig. 9.) 
 This process is the most important one in for- 
 warding, calling for skilled labor. If the hammer is 
 not used in exactly the right way the backs of the 
 
 FIGURE 9. A book rounded and backed. 
 
 signatures may be crushed in, the stitches broken, or 
 the paper or bands cut. In any case the book is mate- 
 rially weakened. A good workman will make a sharp 
 joint and round the book perfectly without injuring 
 its strength in any way. 
 
 19. BACK LINING 
 
 All books have a lining of one kind or another on 
 the back. Machine-bound books are generally lined
 
 PROCESSES 35 
 
 with a coarse "super," as it is called in this country, 
 or "mull" as it is called in England. Some library 
 binders use a thin muslin, but the best material is can- 
 ton flannel cut in strips wide enough to cover the 
 back of the book and also to project about one inch 
 on each side. The back of the book is glued, while 
 the nap or fuzzy side of the canton flannel is pasted 
 and then put on the back and well rubbed down. It 
 is very important that both the glue and the paste be 
 used. Experience has proved that when only one is 
 used the canton flannel will come off, but when both 
 are used, it becomes an integral part of the book. 
 
 The flannel which projects on the sides must be 
 pasted to the end papers. When the paste and the 
 glue have dried, the canton flannel shrinks tight to 
 the back and adds materially to the strength of the 
 book. After drying the flannel is trimmed at the 
 head and tail close to the back. 
 
 If the book is a valuable one that will receive hard 
 usage and therefore should be as strong as possible, 
 the flesh side of a piece of split goat skin can be used 
 for back-lining, covering the back from joint to joint. 
 It will seldom be necessary, however, to employ this 
 method. 
 
 Perhaps nothing better shows the difference be- 
 tween old methods of library binding and new than 
 this one item of backlining. In the old methods the 
 binders depended for strength largely upon the bands. 
 In the new the bands are practically immaterial when 
 the book is fastened into the cover.
 
 36 > LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 20. REBACKING 
 
 At this point some binders reback to make a sharp 
 joint, and to make the book open more easily. When 
 the canton flannel dries it may pull the back somewhat 
 out of shape. It is doubtful, however, if rebacking is 
 always necessary. 
 
 21. BOARDS CUT 
 
 The book is then measured for boards which are 
 cut to the proper size. In measuring it must be re- 
 membered that the boards must project an eighth of 
 an inch on all edges (except the back) forming what 
 is called the "squares." It will also make a difference 
 in measuring if the book is to have a French joint. 
 (See page 46.) 
 
 22. CLOTH CUT 
 
 If the book is to be bound in cloth, this is cut the 
 proper size. If leather backs are to be used the cov- 
 ering material consists of two pieces of cloth and one 
 of leather, all of which must be cut to the proper size. 
 
 23. LOOSE BACK 
 
 If the book is to be made a loose back, a piece 
 of coarse paper is cut the size of the book from joint 
 to joint and the length of the back. This is placed 
 in the book. 
 
 24. MAKING THE CASE 
 
 (a) The cloth for a full cloth book is now glued 
 all over on the inside. The boards are adjusted on 
 the book ("setting the square," as the binders call it)
 
 PROCESSES 37 
 
 as they ought to be when the book is finally bound, 
 and the book is placed on the right-hand side of the 
 glued cloth, with the back toward the middle of the 
 case, leaving enough cloth projecting on all sides to 
 turn in. The other side of the case is then drawn up 
 over the board on top and pressed down firmly 
 enough so that when it is laid back again, the board 
 which has b'een uppermost goes with it. The book 
 itself is laid aside. The paper which is to prevent the 
 glued cloth from sticking to the back of the book is 
 then placed in the space between the two boards, and 
 all edges of the cloth turned in on the boards. This 
 forms the complete cover or case. 
 
 (&) If the book is to have a leather back, the 
 boards are tipped lightly with paste to the end papers, 
 allowing for the French joint. The leather is pasted 
 and the book is then laid on the leather in the right 
 position so that the rest of the leather can be pulled 
 up over the back on the top board. The top cover is 
 then laid back, the paper forming a loose back in- 
 serted, the leather turned in, and cloth sides put on 
 and turned in. 
 
 25. MAKING OF A FRENCH JOINT 
 
 The book is now set back in the cover just de- 
 scribed and the space between the boards and the 
 back is creased with a bone folder while the cloth or 
 leather is damp. This forms the French joint. 
 
 26. PASTING DOWN END PAPERS 
 
 End papers are then pasted down to the boards 
 and the book, so far as strength is concerned, is fin-
 
 3 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 ished. It will be remembered that the end papers 
 were guarded with muslin, or jaconet, that the bands 
 projected beyond the sides and were pasted to the end 
 papers, and that the canton flannel also projected 
 beyond the sides and was pasted to the end papers. 
 Therefore, when the end paper is pasted to the board 
 it carries with it first the canton flannel, then the 
 bands and lastly the jaconet guard. This is as true 
 of leather-backed books as of full cloth. 
 
 Strictly speaking, this makes what is technically 
 known as a "cased" book, i. e., the case is made in 
 one whole piece and the book fastened into it. Be- 
 cause leather bound books have always been consid- 
 ered stronger than others, and because they have 
 always been laced-in to the boards (see page 42) 
 before the leather has been put on, a prejudice 
 against cased books has arisen. If the prejudice be 
 directed against the usual commercial binding it is 
 justified, but if directed against library books prop- 
 erly cased it is not justified. 
 
 27. PRESSING 
 
 At this stage the book is put under heavy pressure 
 in the standing press until dry. A number of books 
 are placed in the press at one time, separated by 
 backing boards having metal projections which fit 
 into the French joints. They should be left twelve 
 hours at least, longer if necessary. After pressing, 
 the book goes through a general cleaning process. In 
 applying the glue or paste there are many chances of 
 soiling the book. The great pressure which is applied
 
 PROCESSES 39 
 
 also squeezes out glue at the head and tail. This 
 must all be cleaned off before the book goes to the 
 finisher. 
 
 FINISHING 
 28. GILDING 
 
 The gilding of a library book is a simple matter 
 compared with that of books bound for individuals. 
 Such books are usually meant to be artistic and their 
 covers bear elaborate designs in gold, generally lim- 
 ited only by the size of the owner's pocketbook or by 
 his taste. 1 In library binding gilding is confined to 
 the furnishing of necessary information^ Tooling of 
 all kinds, with the possible exception of that which 
 divides the back into panels, is unnecessary. A de- 
 scription of finishing processes is unnecessary here 
 since they add nothing to the strength of a book., A 
 description of the method of gilding call numbers will 
 be found on page 194. 
 
 There are three different ways of lettering books 
 bound in light colored cloths on which gold cannot 
 be used: (a) In gold on leather labels pasted to the 
 back. (&) In gold on panels which have been stained 
 black, (c) In black ink directly on the back. The 
 first two methods make more attractive-looking books 
 but the process adds to the expense, and in the first 
 case the labels have a tendency to peel off. The last 
 method is the one generally used. 
 
 In this description of processes numerous details 
 
 1 Finishing from the artistic point of view with an excellent descrip- 
 tion of tools, materials and processes will be found in Cockerell's 
 "Binding and the care of books," Chapter 14.
 
 4<> LIBRARY BOOKBINDING . 
 
 have been omitted, because they would add little, if 
 anything, to the librarian's ability to criticize properly 
 the work being done by his binder. 1 In some re- 
 spects the order here outlined may differ in different 
 binderies, but the majority follow it closely. 
 
 The processes as outlined are those which should 
 be used in library binding. There are, however, sev- 
 eral additional points relating to binding processes 
 with which it is well to be familiar. 
 
 RAISED BANDS 
 
 In looking at many old books bound in the 
 eighteenth or early part of the ninteenth century, 
 or at books bound within recent years for individuals, 
 one will find many that have the back divided by 
 ridges. These are known as "raised bands." They 
 are formed by sewing the book differently from 
 either of the methods described up to this point. 
 
 According to this method the bands are not placed 
 in grooves which sink them below the surface of the 
 back, but are simply laid against the back. In sewing 
 the thread may come out at the near side of the band 
 and in at the far side, thus going around the band 
 on the back of the book; or it may come out at the 
 far side and in at the near side, thus entirely encirc- 
 ling the band. In either case the sewing is exceed- 
 ingly strong. Since the bands are entirely on the 
 surface, the leaves open all the way to the back of 
 the signatures and greater flexibility can be obtained 
 thereby. (Fig. 10.) 
 
 1 For instructions to the binder about type, space, lettering, etc., 
 see under Lettering, page 141.
 
 PROCESSES 
 
 <g 
 
 FIGURE 10. Sewing on raised bands. No saw cuts except for 
 kettle stitches. Based on illustration in Report of the 
 Committee on Leather for Bookbinding. Edited for So- 
 ciety of Arts, London, 1905. 
 
 As it is much more difficult to sew and forward 
 books with raised bands, they are not used in ordi-
 
 42 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 nary library work. It may be advisable, however, to 
 use them occasionally on a few large reference books 
 such as dictionaries, where great flexibility combined 
 with strength is essential. In fact the merits of 
 binding in this way are not recognized as generally 
 as they should be. 
 
 Many books look as if they were sewed on raised 
 bands when in reality they are sewed in the ordinary 
 way, with false raised bands pasted on the back. 
 They add nothing to strength and have no place in 
 library binding. 
 
 LACING-IN 
 
 Lacing-in is a method of attaching the bands to 
 the book, which is in general use for all leather books 
 bound by hand. This method requires that the 
 boards which have been cut to the proper size be laid 
 against the grooves formed in backing and marks be 
 made about half an inch in from the back, opposite 
 each band. At these points holes are punched through 
 the board which is then turned over and other holes 
 are punched about half an inch from the first ones. 
 It is generally desirable to cut a groove in the board 
 from the first holes to the edge of the board, for the 
 bands to lie in, so that there will not be an unsightly 
 protuberance when the book is bound. The bands 
 which have been frayed out are then threaded through 
 the first holes from the outside of the board inward 
 and again through the second holes. They are drawn 
 up tightly enough so that the board will fit close to 
 the joint, but not enough to prevent it from lying flat.
 
 PROCESSES 
 
 43 
 
 The ends of the bands are spread out fan-wise, 
 pasted, and hammered down smooth on the board. 
 Before any back-lining has been put on, the boards 
 are attached to the book simply by these bands. 
 (Fig. n.) 
 
 When bands are laced-in it is not customary to 
 use anything stronger than paper for back lining; 
 
 FIGURE u. Bands laced in, and ends frayed out. Based on 
 illustration in Report of the Committee on Leather for 
 Bookbinding. Edited for Society of Arts, London, 1905. 
 
 the strength of the book lies in the bands and the 
 leather which covers the back. As long as the leather 
 remains strong and the book does not receive hard 
 usage this method is satisfactory. As soon, however, 
 as the leather begins to disintegrate more strain is 
 placed upon the bands. When the leather breaks 
 completely the bands bear the entire burden at the 
 joint, and eventually break, With the process as out- 
 lined in the preceding pages one need never fear that 
 the book will come out of the cover, or that the sides
 
 44 
 
 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 FIGURE 12. Split boards. In actual work the backlining 
 would cover the entire back. 
 
 will break at the joint. Even if the leather should 
 break the canton flannel will hold. The best library 
 binders do no lacing-in at the present time. 
 
 SPLIT BOARDS 
 
 While the old method of lacing-in is not desirable 
 in library binding, the method of using split boards 
 makes a very strong book. Instead of making a case 
 of cloth, or cloth and leather, the back lining and the 
 bands (or tapes) are inserted in boards which have 
 been split, or between two thin boards glued together 
 with a space left unglued for this purpose. The 
 covering material is put on after the book is in boards 
 and the book is made tight backed.. This is probably 
 the strongest method of attaching a book to the 
 boards. In fact it is stronger than is necessary for 
 any except very heavy books which receive hard wear. 
 (Fig. 12.) 
 
 TIGHT AND LOOSE BACKS 
 
 For years there has been a certain mild contro- 
 versy regarding the relative merits of tight and loose
 
 PROCESSES 
 
 45 
 
 backs for leather bound books. Tight backs are 
 those in which the material used for covering the 
 book is pasted or glued to the back. Loose backs are 
 those which, by means of folded paper or a piece of 
 paper put in as described on page 37, are prevented 
 from adhering to the back. When the book is opened 
 the back springs out. (Fig. 13.) 
 
 The tight back book always forms a hinge at the 
 place where the book is opened. Since the place of 
 the hinge is constantly changing the back of the book 
 after much use becomes concave instead of convex, 
 and the appearance of the book is seriously marred. 
 Also the constant creasing of the back tends to erase 
 the gold lettering, so that it becomes indistinct. If 
 labels are put on they speedily come off. It is cus- 
 tomary to use tight backs on very heavy books, 
 though there are cases where such books have been 
 put in loose backs. 
 
 FIGURE 13. Tight back and loose back.
 
 46 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 The loose-back book always preserves its shape 
 and good appearance, even when the paper on the 
 inside may be so badly worn that the book should be 
 withdrawn. The strain, however, always comes at 
 the joint; therefore if poor leather is used it will 
 quickly wear out at this point. 
 
 Each method has its advocates, but so far as the 
 present writer can learn, there seems to be little 
 to choose from the standpoint of strength. It 
 might seem that the tight-back book would be the 
 stronger, but as a matter of fact in actual wear loose- 
 back books seem to hold their own with the others. 
 In fact when the soft, spongy papers are used the 
 loose backs are obviously stronger. It seems clear 
 that there is little choice one way or the other, and 
 the question must be decided by the personal prefer- 
 ence of the librarian. 
 
 JOINTS 
 
 In library binding French joints are now used in 
 place of regular joints. Figure 14 shows plainly the 
 difference between the two. In the regular joint it 
 will be noticed that when the book is opened there is 
 a sharp crease in one line from head to tail. In the 
 French joint the strain is distributed over a much 
 greater area. In regular joints the leather is some- 
 times pared at the joints to permit of easier opening 
 of the book. In French joints the full thickness of 
 the leather can be used. French joints are made by 
 setting the boards away from the back about one- 
 eighth of an inch. When the cover is put on it is
 
 PROCESSES 
 
 47 
 
 necessary to crease between the board and the back 
 while the leather is still damp. 
 
 An excellent illustration showing the anatomy of 
 a joint may be found on page 51 of Dana's "Notes on 
 bookbinding for libraries," ed. 2.. 
 
 A Section of n Ordinary ioint with the board open shows that the sreas'nj of the (eatlicr 
 
 and so enables sufficient flexibility to be obtained with much thicker leather than can be 
 used with an ordinary joint. 
 
 FIGURE 14. French joint. From Report of the Committee on 
 Leathers for Bookbinding. Edited for Society of Arts, 
 London, 1905. 
 
 CORNERS 
 
 Corners on library books should be rounded to 
 prevent the board from breaking if the book falls and 
 to prevent the cloth from wearing through at this 
 point. Rounded corners are peculiar to library bind- 
 ing. As a rule they are not made by cutting off a 
 corner of the board, but by turning in the cloth diag- 
 onally from the corner and then from the side and 
 end. Sometimes both methods are adopted. If gov- 
 ernment specification cloth is used it is probable that 
 "library corners" will not be necessary.
 
 48 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 In some libraries pieces of leather or vellum are 
 put on corners. Leather is put on in order to raise 
 the bottom of the boards from the shelf, while vellum 
 is used to make the corners hard and prevent them 
 from breaking or showing signs of wear. While 
 both serve the purpose for which they are intended, 
 the process of putting them on adds materially to the 
 expense, and in most cases this is not warranted by 
 the increased use of the book. 
 
 TRIMMING 
 
 Binders should be instructed to trim as little as 
 possible. This is important for all books, but most 
 of all for periodicals. In fiction and juvenile books it 
 is important to have wide margins, because the text 
 will remain legible for a longer period of time if pro- 
 tected by a margin from the contact of hands. Non- 
 fiction books which are likely to remain in use for a 
 longer period of years may need to be rebound and 
 trimmed again. Therefore wide margins are essen- 
 tial to good wear as well as to good appearance. 
 
 It is customary to bind front covers of periodicals. 
 Sometimes it is desirable to bind advertising pages, 
 and it is necessary to do so when the publishers fol- 
 low the pernicious practice of continuing regular 
 articles on advertising pages. Covers and advertising 
 pages are generally printed with much narrower 
 margins than the body of the magazine and unless 
 great care is taken in trimming parts of the printed 
 matter will be cut off.
 
 PROCESSES 49 
 
 HEADBANDS 
 
 Cotton headbands can be added during the for- 
 warding but inasmuch as they are simply pasted on 
 they add nothing to the strength and very little to the 
 beauty of the book. When silk headbands are care- 
 fully sewed on they add both strength and beauty. 
 An excellent description of the process of putting on 
 headbands will be found in Cockerell's "Binding and 
 the care of books," page 147. 
 
 HOW TO RECOGNIZE A WELL BOUND BOOK 
 
 The ability to recognize a well bound book is 
 necessary when comparing the work of different 
 binders. A book should be bound in material suitable 
 for the use which the book is to receive and in such 
 a way as to give the maximum amount of service. It 
 should also be as attractive in appearance as is com- 
 patible with these two requirements. In deciding 
 whether a book is suitably bound for library use the 
 following points should be kept in mind: 
 
 1. A volume must show evidence of neat and 
 careful workmanship. 
 
 2. If the book is to be used constantly leather is 
 essential ; if occasionally only, leather is an element 
 of weakness. 
 
 3. All books that receive hard usage should have 
 end papers and fly-leaves guarded with cloth. If 
 sewed regularly the first and last signatures also 
 should be guarded. 
 
 4. Saw cuts should not be deep. 
 
 5. The book should be flexible and stay flat
 
 50 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 wherever opened. (This is not always possible in the 
 case of overcast books or books printed on stiff, brittle 
 paper.) 
 
 6. When the book is lying flat the top should 
 remain flat. When standing on end the sections 
 should not separate slightly at the back. 
 
 7. The book should feel firm and compact to the 
 hand. 
 
 8. When opened the volume should not make a 
 crackling noise due to too much glue on the back. 
 
 9. The book should have a well rounded back 
 and the cover should fit well at the joint. Flat backs 
 are not desirable. 
 
 10. Margins should be wide and cut straight. 
 Periodicals should not be trimmed so that printing on 
 covers or advertisements is cut off. 
 
 11. The book should have French joints. 
 
 12. The cover should not separate easily from 
 the book when pressure is applied. 
 
 13. Lettering on the back should be legible and 
 put on straight. 
 
 14. On opening the book sections at the back 
 should be perfectly smooth, showing that they have 
 not been crushed in backing. 
 
 15. Guards for plates, maps, sections, etc., should J 
 be so applied as to leave the paper un wrinkled.
 
 CHAPTER IV 
 MATERIALS 
 
 In a recent pamphlet issued by the Government 
 Printing-office, containing a list of materials and 
 articles used in the printing and binding of public 
 documents, the number of items for binding alone 
 reaches the surprising total of 171. Many of these 
 are materials used in marbling, others indicate slight 
 variations of color and weight in standard leathers 
 and cloths. But exclusive of all these the number 
 of materials called for is over forty. 
 
 It is not the writer's purpose to discuss all of these 
 forty or more materials, but it seems necessary to 
 mention that many materials other than those used 
 in covering books (always some kind of cloth or 
 leather) are used in binding. Furthermore, the 
 strength of the book after it is bound will depend 
 almost as much upon the materials used in its inner 
 construction as upon those used in covering it. The 
 inner materials, if not wisely selected as to quality 
 or in reference to the kind of service which the book 
 is to receive, may cause an otherwise excellently 
 bound book to give poor service. 
 
 In general, however, a reference to binding ma- 
 terials means those which are used in covering books. 
 It is the cover which renders a book attractive or
 
 52 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 unattractive, and which contributes more than any 
 other one item, except possibly sewing, to the long 
 life of the book. We should therefore know the initial 
 cost of different covering materials and the length 
 of service which each material will give under dif- 
 ferent conditions. When they are not imitations we 
 should be able to recognize the best-known materials, 
 either on or off the books. An unscrupulous binder 
 can easily take advantage of ignorance of these 
 matters. 
 
 So far as the librarian is concerned only two 
 classes of materials need be considered for the 
 covers of books leathers and book cloths. This does 
 not indicate a restriction of choice, for when we con- 
 sider that leather comes from a large number of 
 animals, that there are a great many different kinds 
 of cloth, that cloths and leathers can be obtained in 
 a great variety of colors, there seems to be an 
 embarrassment of riches. As a matter of fact most 
 librarians confine themselves to four kinds of leather 
 and four or five kinds of cloth, each in three or four 
 different shades. 
 
 LEATHER 
 
 The most expensive materials used in covering 
 books and those which vary most in quality are 
 leathers, the skins of animals which have been tanned 
 and made flexible. The best bookbinding leathers are 
 those which are flexible both in the skin and on books, 
 and the surface of which is not easily damaged by 
 friction. Owing to the many kinds of leathers and
 
 MATERIALS S3 
 
 their variation in quality, it is difficult to learn to 
 know them well. 
 
 The skins of all sorts of animals have been used 
 for covering books. Certain ones, not suitable for 
 library binding, are still used for the purpose in 
 various parts of the country, so that librarians need 
 to become expert in their knowledge of which leathers 
 may be employed and which ought to be rejected. 
 
 Variations in the same kinds of leathers are 
 caused by: 
 
 (a) Age. Skins of animals which have not- 
 reached full growth should not be used for binding 
 library books. Since they are immature, the fibres 
 have not become tough, and they have not reached 
 their maximum thickness. If the skins which the 
 binder is using are exceptionally small, it is probable 
 that the animals from which they were obtained were 
 too young. On the other hand, the skins of very old 
 animals should not be used, since the fibres of the 
 skins have lost something of their flexibility and 
 strength. They cannot be readily detected, but they 
 are sure to give poor service. As an illustration of 
 the effect which age has upon leather it will be 
 sufficient to note the well-known fact that calf skin 
 is useless for library purposes, while cow-hide within 
 certain well-defined limits is exceedingly useful. 
 
 (&) ^TJie sex of the animal. It has been proved 
 beyond question that the skin from the female of 
 some animals, notably goats, does not wear as well 
 as that from the male. 
 
 (c) Country from ivhich they qome. It is an
 
 54 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 interesting fact that the skin of a sheep which comes 
 from Persia is not the same kind of a skin as that 
 of a sheep which is raised in the United States. In 
 general, it may be said that skins from animals 
 inhabiting warm countries are more likely to be ser- 
 viceable than those from the same kind of animals 
 inhabiting cold countries. In the cold countries more 
 of the strength goes into the fur or hair which protects 
 it, while in warm countries a greater amount of 
 strength goes into the skin itself. 
 
 In addition to variations due to these causes there 
 is likely to be a certain amount of variation in differ- 
 ent parts of the same skin. That part of the skin 
 which comes from the back of the animal is tougher 
 than that which comes from the abdomen. The 
 difference is very noticeable in the skins of some 
 animals, less so in others. 
 
 Decay of Leather. Of late years there has been 
 much dissatisfaction expressed over the decay of 
 modern leathers. In many cases leathers 100 years 
 old or more are in a fair state of preservation, while 
 many leathers perhaps we should say most leathers 
 30, 20 or even 10 years old, show signs of decay, 
 and some have rotted away almost entirely. In no 
 way is the decay of modern leathers shown more 
 conclusively than in a long file of the sheep-bound 
 set of the United States Public Documents. The 
 earlier volumes, covering the I5th Congress up to 
 the 36th, will in general be found to be in a good 
 state of preservation. About the year 1860, how- 
 ever, marked deterioration appears. In some cases it
 
 MATERIALS 55 
 
 seems as if the backs had entirely disintegrated. 
 While a sheep-bound set is the best example of the 
 decay of modern leathers, many libraries have been 
 greatly annoyed by the decay of other leathers which 
 are supposed to be much stronger than sheepskin. 
 
 So great was the dissatisfaction with modern 
 leathers that in the year 1900 the Society of Arts in 
 London appointed a committee to investigate modern 
 leathers and to ascertain the best methods for pre- 
 paring leathers for binding. The report of this com- 
 mittee was published in 1905, and a general knowl- 
 edge of its contents is necessary for those who wish 
 to know why leathers decay and how they may be 
 preserved. Another valuable work which should be 
 carefully studied is entitled "Leathers for libraries," 
 published by the Sound Leather Committee of the 
 Library Association in England. In a chapter of this 
 book J. Gordon Parker, Ph. D., Director of the Lon- 
 don Leather Industries Research Laboratories, tells 
 us that the chief causes of decay are as follows : 
 
 i. The introduction of tanning materials other than oak 
 and sumac, stronger in tannin, and more rapid in their action. 
 Many of these tanning materials are unstable, and the leather 
 produced disintegrates on exposure to light and air. 
 
 Tanning is the process of changing hides, which 
 are; animal matter subject to decay, into material 
 which is strong and flexible and which is not subject 
 to decay. There are two groups of tanning materials. 
 The one called the pyrogallol group, which includes 
 sumac, gall nuts and oak bark, is commended by the 
 Committee of the Society of Arts. The other is
 
 56 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 called the catechol group and is strongly condemned. 
 Among the materials belonging to the catechol group 
 are hemlock bark and larch, used chiefly in this 
 country, and turwar bark used largely in tanning 
 East Indian goat and sheep skins. 
 
 The United States Government Printing Office 
 proposals call for leathers tanned with a pyrogallol 
 tannin, since it has been proved that such leathers 
 prove most resistant to the evil effects of light, heat 
 and gas. If a skin has been tanned with sumac, or 
 sumac in combination with oak bark, it has received 
 the best possible preparation for its life as a book- 
 binding leather. 
 
 It is not possible, neither is it necessary, to have 
 all leathers tanned with sumac. Those leathers which 
 are intended to remain on the shelves for many de- 
 cades, should be in this tannage. Those which will 
 be discarded in a few years may be tanned in a less 
 expensive manner. Even some of the quick, modern 
 materials, which accomplish in a few hours what 
 once would have taken weeks, are not too poor for 
 leathers which are not to be kept indefinitely. 
 
 Even the expert cannot detect skins which have 
 not been tanned and dyed properly, but leathers which 
 last a short time may be suspected either of being 
 improperly tanned or of having some kind of injurious 
 acid in their composition. 
 
 2. The use of dried and cured skins of variable sound- 
 ness imported from abroad. Goat, calf and sheep skins are 
 imported into this country (England) from all over the 
 world; some are simply dried in the sun, some salted, whilst 
 others are cured with various ingredients."
 
 MATERIALS 57 
 
 3. The use of infusions of acids and other bleaching 
 agents to produce bright and even shades of colour. 
 
 Skins tanned with sumac are light-colored and- 
 ean be dyed any desired color. Most other tanning 
 materials, however, make darker-colored skins, which 
 can be dyed only with dark colors. It has been 
 found possible to scour and bleach skins with sul- 
 phuric acid and to re-tan with sumac. 
 
 4. The use of sulphuric or other mineral acids for the 
 purpose of developing the depth of colour during the process 
 of dyeing. 
 
 Sulphuric acid is the cause of decay of over 90 
 of modern bookbinding leathers. Having once been 
 used, it cannot be wholly removed without the use 
 of other chemicals. 
 
 5. The shaving and splitting of skins for producing an 
 even substance. 
 
 In splitting and shaving, the long, strongest fibres 
 of the skin are torn or cut off, and the part which 
 remains for binding purposes is the weakest part of 
 the skin. 
 
 6. Printing and embossing grains upon leather, together 
 with other methods of finishing now in common use. 
 
 There are various ways of bringing out the nat- 
 ural grain of leathers which are perfectly legitimate 
 and which do no harm. The danger in graining 
 comes when the grain is embossed by means of a 
 plate, which is heated and pressed on the skin. No 
 good leather should ever be embossed.
 
 5 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 7. The stripping, scouring, souring and re-tanning of 
 East India leathers (Persians). 
 
 Some imported skins are only partially tanned, 
 and it is necessary to wash out the tannin with some 
 kind of alkali, which also takes out much of the 
 natural grease of the skin. They are then treated 
 with sulphuric acid and re-tanned. They are always 
 poor and are seldom sold as re-tanned skins. 
 
 8. The removal of the natural grease or nourishment of 
 the skin. 
 
 The foregoing eight causes of decay are beyond 
 our direct control. The leathers are manufactured 
 and put on the market, and the binder has to use such 
 as he is able to obtain. No matter how much the 
 librarian may insist upon leathers free-from-acid, he 
 is helpless if the binder cannot obtain them. All that 
 he can do is to insist that leathers without acid must 
 be used, if obtainable. 
 
 Although these causes of decay are beyond the 
 librarian's control, there are several causes of decay 
 quite within his power to avoid. They are the fol- 
 lowing, due to improper methods used in binding, 
 or to physical conditions after tfie book is on the 
 shelf: 
 
 1. Direct sunlight. 
 
 2. Gas fumes. This evil is hard to guard against 
 if there are gas pipes in the building. There is sure 
 to be more or less leakage, and even a small amount 
 of gas in the air has a bad effect upon leather. 
 
 3. Tobacco smoke. This is not likely to be very
 
 MATERIALS 59 
 
 detrimental in libraries, since the rules generally 
 forbid smoking. 
 
 4. Excessive dampness, which encourages mil- 
 dew. 
 
 5. Extreme dry heat. A temperature much in 
 excess of 70 Fahrenheit is likely to dry up the oil 
 which gives flexibility to leather. 
 
 6. Undue wetting or stretching the leather in 
 covering. Some binders soak the leathers and stretch 
 them in placing them on the books. When the leath- 
 ers dry they shrink, the fibres are strained and the 
 life of the leather shortened. 
 
 7. Use of poor paste in binding. This fre- 
 quently sets up a fermentation that is very harmful to 
 leathers. 
 
 8. Dust, especially in conjunction with dampness, 
 is very injurious to leather. 
 
 Doubtless there are other things which have a 
 deleterious effect upon leathers in libraries; but if a 
 library is well ventilated, if leather-covered books are 
 not kept in cellars or basements that are very damp, 
 or where direct sunlight can fall upon them, and if 
 the binder uses good paste and proper care in cover- 
 ing the books, we may reasonably place the respon- 
 sibility of undue decay of leathers upon the manu- 
 facturers. 
 
 The various reports quoted so far have dealt 
 with qualities of leathers due to tanning, manufac- 
 ture, method of binding and time in use. Natural 
 or mechanical qualities of leathers have not been 
 touched upon. Those who are interested in this phase
 
 60 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 of the question should read the report of Mr. Cedric 
 Olivers on "The relative value of leathers and other 
 binding materials," made at the meeting of the Ameri- 
 can Library Association at Pasadena in 1911. Mr. 
 Chivers employed Mr. Alfred Seymour Jones, in 
 England, to make tests which would show the 
 tearing and breaking strain of various leathers. 
 These natural qualities of leathers are obviously im- 
 portant, but too much stress must not be laid upon 
 them. It is possible that a leather naturally strong 
 and tough when new would rapidly deteriorate with 
 age. The records as presented in Mr. Chivers' report 
 must be taken in conjunction with facts determined by 
 the investigation of the Society of Arts. In the main, 
 however, it will be found that leathers which best 
 stood the tests of the Society of Arts also showed the 
 greatest resistance to the tearing and breaking strains 
 made by Mr. Chivers. 
 
 Preservation of Leather. Various attempts have 
 been made both by librarians and others to discover 
 some substance which would preserve leather effec- 
 tually after the book is bound. Some of these at- 
 tempts have been temporarily successful, but time 
 alone will tell whether leathers are permanently 
 preserved by the treatments used, or whether appli- 
 cations of the preservative must be frequently made. 
 Owing to the fact that in law libraries practically all 
 the books published previous to 1900 were bound in 
 sheepskin, the lasting qualities of leathers is a ques- 
 tion that affects law libraries more than any other. 
 Dr. Wire, of the Worcester (Mass.) County Law 
 Library, who has made a careful study of the
 
 MATERIALS 6l 
 
 problem, advises the use of vaseline or some other 
 similar by-product of petroleum well rubbed into the 
 leather with the bare hand and allowed to dry in the 
 air until the leather has absorbed it. Better results 
 were obtained by allowing the volumes to dry in the 
 summer by natural heat instead of artificial heat in 
 the winter. For some books Dr. Wire makes use of 
 a bookbinder's varnish after the softening product 
 has thoroughly penetrated the leather. A full descrip- 
 tion of the processes may be obtained from Dr. Wire's 
 pamphlet, "Leather preservation," published in 1911. 
 Some of the disadvantages of Dr. Wire's method 
 are: 
 
 1. The necessity of rubbing in the preservative 
 from three to five times, according to the condition of 
 the leather at the time of first treatment. 
 
 2. The care necessary to prevent the material 
 used from smearing tables, trucks, floor, shelves and 
 clothing at time of application ; also when books are 
 back on the shelves the care required to keep from 
 rubbing against them and the necessity of wiping 
 them off when they are handed to readers. 
 
 3. The tendency of books to swell at the back 
 when first treated in this way, demanding extra care 
 lest, in an effort to pull out one book, a whole shelf- 
 full fall to the floor. 
 
 4. The repetition of the process after ten years. 
 It is possible that these drawbacks will be sufficient 
 
 to dissuade all except the most stout-hearted from 
 using this method of preserving leather. Rebinding 
 in cloth seems to be much more simple and, on the 
 whole, not much more expensive.
 
 62 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 The question of a preservative is discussed in 
 the Report of the Society of Arts, from which the 
 following quotation is taken: 
 
 Enquiries have frequently been made as to the use of 
 preservative pastes upon old bindings. It has been mentioned 
 that the seasonings of white of egg or blood albumen usually 
 employed in finishing leather have some preservative effect, 
 and no harm can arise from the application of very thin 
 coatings of white of egg. The use of ammonia to thin or 
 preserve the solution must be avoided, but the whites, after 
 thorough beating, may be rendered antiseptic by the addition 
 of a small quantity of camphor, thymol, or some essential oil. 
 Vaseline has been employed as a dressing, and, if otherwise 
 suitable, will no doubt have a preservative effect upon the 
 leather. A very moderate use of the wax, soap, and turpen- 
 tine preparations made as shoe pastes, is also likely to be 
 beneficial, and no doubt a special preparation might be made 
 on these lines which would be still more suitable. Parafin wax 
 dissolved in benzine is also harmless, and the surface to 
 which it has been applied takes a good polish with a flannel 
 after drying. Professor Proctor has experimented with a 
 finish introduced by the Berlin Aniline Company some years 
 ago for coloured leathers, with apparently satisfactory results. 
 The preparation is practically a very hard stearine soap with 
 excess of stearic acid, and is made by boiling 8 parts of 
 stearic acid with i part of caustic soda and 50 parts of water 
 until thoroughly dissolved, and then adding 150 parts of cold 
 water and stirring till the material sets to a jelly. It is 
 applied very thinly with a sponge or rag, and after thorough 
 drying is polished with a soft brush or flannel. The alkali 
 present in the soap is useful in neutralising any mineral ack 
 contained in the leather. In very acid leathers it has be.cn 
 noticed that the sodium sulphate so formed will sometimes 
 appear upon the surface as a white film, but this is easily 
 removed with a damp cloth, and the surface, after drying, 
 repolished with flannel.
 
 MATERIALS 63 
 
 Old books which it is desirable to preserve as 
 long as possible in their original bindings and books 
 which will be used very little may be treated with 
 some form of preservative. If the book is to be 
 much used, it would better be rebound. Dr. Wire's 
 experiments have been carried on exclusively with 
 law books. Whether the same processes could be 
 used on books bound in morocco or pigskin is some- 
 thing that has not yet been determined. Most 
 leather-bound books break first at the joint. The 
 sheep bindings in a law library would show signs 
 of disintegration long before the leather reached the 
 breaking point, whereas the librarian would first 
 notice that morocco was decaying when the leather 
 actually cracked. Once cracked, no amount of pre- 
 servative would do any good. 
 
 KINDS OF LEATHER^ 
 
 The leathers that have been used in binding books 
 have come from all sorts of animals, but so far as 
 the librarian is concerned the skins of four animals 
 only need be taken into consideration the sheep, the 
 cow, the pig and the goat. In England some experi- 
 ments have been made with sealskin, but it has not 
 been used long enough to give any definite idea of its 
 resistance to the encroachments of time. 
 
 SHEEPSKIN 
 
 Sheepskin is a soft, flexible leather with weak 
 fibres, and with a surface easily abraded. It has been 
 
 1 The prices of leathers given in the text are those which prevailed 
 during the summer of 1915.
 
 64 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 used for bindings practically ever since books were 
 put into leathers; and, under the old methods of 
 tanning and manufacturing, proved satisfactory. In 
 many libraries it is possible to see leather books bound 
 in sheep in the I7th century which are in a good 
 state of preservation. Even the sheep of the begin- 
 ning 'of the i pth century is frequently well preserved. 
 Since 1860, however, the quality of sheep has greatly 
 deteriorated. This is bad enough, but unfortunately 
 sheep likes to masquerade under the name of morocco 
 and other leathers of a better grade, so that its use 
 is much more extensive than appears at first sight. 
 In the process of imitation the grain of the leather 
 imitated is stamped on the skin. When this is done 
 it generally takes an expert to detect the fact that 
 the leather is not what it pretends to be, and even 
 experts are sometimes deceived after the leather is on 
 a book. 
 
 The strongest sheepskins are made when tanned 
 with oak bark. Sumac, which is such a valuable 
 tanning material with other leathers, is here inferior 
 to oak. 
 
 There are two kinds of sheepskin, the wool sheep 
 which is known to all, and the hair sheep which is not 
 found in the United States, and which in reality is a 
 cross between a sheep and a goat. The hair sheep 
 comes from India, China, South America and Africa, 
 generally from mountainous districts. It has a much 
 tougher fibre and. is a better wearing skin than that 
 of the wool sheep. Unfortunately most of t! 
 skins, which are all imported, are made in'o shoe
 
 MATERIALS 65 
 
 leather. When properly tanned they are very suit- 
 able for library binding, and their use for that purpose 
 is increasing. 
 
 The wool sheepskin in its natural color has been 
 used for many years for binding law books. It is 
 seldom used for anything except government docu- 
 ments and law books, and for this reason is known 
 as "law-sheep." 
 
 Roan. Roans, the term used for sheepskins after 
 they are dyed, can be used advantageously on books 
 which will be handled a great deal, and which in any 
 event will not stay on the shelves indefinitely. Prop- 
 erly tanned and dyed, they make a satisfactory leather 
 for a time, but their life under the best of conditions 
 seldpm exceeds ten or twelve years. While this is 
 true of good roans, it unfortunately remains true that 
 in the United States, at least, it is difficult to get roans 
 that are properly tanned and dyed. Therefore, unless 
 one is sure that the quality of the skin is the best, he 
 should use no sheep under any conditions. 
 
 Skiver. Skiver is the outside of a sheepskin 
 which has been split, the inner side being known as 
 the flesher. It is a leather much used for commer- 
 cial binding, but since the splitting process takes 
 away a great part of the strength of the skin, leaving 
 it not much stronger than strong paper, skiver is 
 wholly unfitted for library use. 
 
 COWHIDE 
 
 Cowhide, sometimes known as American russia, 
 is a leather which has increased enormously in use in
 
 66 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 the last twenty-five years. It is a thick, coarse 
 leather, rather unattractive in appearance, strong when 
 new, but with age rapidly deteriorating in quality, 
 even when no deleterious substance has been used in 
 tanning or dyeing. It is a harder leather to work 
 than roan, but the quality is much more uniform and 
 it can be used advantageously for binding fiction and 
 other books which will be much used. In its natural 
 state (undyed) it can be used in place of law-sheep 
 for law books, but has a tendency to become dark. 
 It can be obtained in many colors. Since it is too 
 thick a leather to be used in full thickness, practically 
 all skins are split, and the amount of flesh left with 
 the grain determines the weight of the leather. A 
 greater or less amount is taken off according to the 
 purpose for which the leather is intended. Book- 
 binding cowhide costing 2oc to 2$c. a square foot is 
 the lightest weight leather that has the right to be 
 called cow. 1 The life of cowhide is from five to 
 twelve years. 
 
 Buffing. Buffing is practically only the grain of 
 cowskin from which almost all the flesh has been 
 split. It is not suitable for library books, since it is 
 very thin and begins to disintegrate in less than five 
 years. After it is on the volume it is hard to detect, so 
 that some library binders have been tempted to use it 
 instead of cow. But as buffing is never sold as cow, 
 the library binder has no excuse for keeping it in 
 stock. 
 
 1 This is the normal price of cow. The European war has had the 
 disastrous effect of raising the price and lowering the quality. Until 
 conditions become normal again all cowhide should be shunned.
 
 MATERIALS 67 
 
 PIGSKIN 
 
 Pigskin is one of the strongest leathers, having a 
 hard, resisting surface and a good, tough fibre. In 
 the grain, the holes which were left when bristles 
 were removed are plainly visible, giving the leather 
 a distinctive appearance, which can be imitated suc- 
 cessfully, but which is much less often imitated than 
 the grain of morocco. If there be doubt of the gen- 
 uineness of pig, soak a piece of the leather until it 
 has absorbed a quantity of water, and then stretch it. 
 If the grain pulls out, it is imitation; if genuine, the 
 bristle holes still show plainly. Oak bark tanning is 
 the best for this leather, and, since it is more nearly 
 gristle (less fibrous) than other leathers, dyes and 
 chemicals should not be used which will interfere 
 with its quality of resisting friction. It should be 
 used in its natural color whenever possible. 
 
 Pigskin frequently comes in skins which are too 
 thick for the binder to work easily, or which are very 
 uneven in thickness. In such cases the paring down 
 of the skin is likely to injure its strength. Because 
 of its thickness pig is generally supposed to be 
 more suitable for large than for small books, but 
 inasmuch as several binders have used it successfully 
 for years on small books, it may be taken for granted 
 that it can be used with good results on all books, 
 large or small, which are to receive hard usage. It 
 needs constant handling, and the absorption of a 
 certain amount of oil from the hands to keep it pliable. 
 Otherwise it dries rapidly and cracks along the joint.
 
 68 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 This, however, is true of all leathers to a greater or 
 less 'extent. Pig costs from 400. to 450. a square foot. 
 
 GOAT 
 
 The leather which makes the strongest and most 
 attractive binding comes from the skins of goats and 
 is called morocco, because it originally came from that 
 country. In the course of time goat skins from other 
 countries were tanned with sumac (originally a dis- 
 tinguishing characteristic of a genuine morocco), but 
 the same name was applied so that we now have the 
 paradoxical terms, Turkey morocco, Levant morocco, 
 etc. Moroccos have a beautiful grain, are flexible, 
 soft and pliable to the hand, and resist hard wear; 
 qualities which contribute to their great popularity. 
 
 Morocco varies greatly in quality as well as in 
 appearance. Unfortunately the skins which are best 
 in quality, considering the length of time they will 
 wear, are not always those best in appearance. The 
 skins of goats with long hair from the colder coun- 
 tries make beautiful bindings; but the skins of goats 
 from the hot countries, such as the interior of Africa, 
 having short hair, while not so attractive in appear- 
 ance, are tougher and wear longer. In addition to 
 the many grades of genuine morocco there are as 
 many more imitations of it made from sheepskin, cow- 
 hide, etc. Only the expert can detect some of them in 
 the skin, and even he may be deceived when the 
 leather is on the back of the book. 
 
 In general it should be said that genuine morocco 
 is the most expensive leather that a library can use,
 
 MATERIALS 6p 
 
 and that it can be used to the greatest advantage only 
 occasionally. It makes an excellent binding for large 
 reference books which are constantly handled, for art 
 books which must be attractively bound, and for some 
 periodicals which are much used in reference work. 
 It is not used nearly so much in libraries today as it 
 was ten or fifteen years ago, and it is quite safe to 
 say that it will be used less ten years from today 
 than it is now. 
 
 Levant morocco, made from the skins of Angora 
 goats, is the most expensive and most beautiful 
 leather used in binding. It has a large, prominent 
 grain, but is far too expensive for any library to use, 
 especially when it must be conceded that in its wear- 
 ing quality it does not equal that of some less expen- 
 sive moroccos. Mr. Olivers' test showed that so 
 far as tensile strength goes, this leather is very much 
 weaker than many leathers much less expensive. 
 When the skin has been subjected to pressure until 
 the surface is smooth it is known as "crusl^ed levant." 
 
 Turkey morocco, made of skins of goats from 
 Turkey, is a very strong, durable leather which all 
 libraries will find occasion to use from time to time. 
 It is very easily imitated. Under exposure to atmos- 
 pheric conditions existing in many libraries its life 
 may not extend beyond thirty years. In one library at 
 least, where conditions of light and heat were poor, 
 the best Turkey morocco that the market afforded 
 showed signs of disintegration within twelve years. 
 Good Turkey morocco can be obtained for 35c. a 
 square foot.
 
 70 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 Persian morocco, which comes from the skin of a 
 Persian sheep (not goat), is not particularly attrac- 
 tive in appearance and is very poor in quality. It is 
 used extensively for commercial work, but is abso- 
 lutely valueless for library binding. 
 
 Niger morocco is a goat skin which comes from 
 the interior of Africa, generally by way of Tripoli, 
 and is by no means a recent discovery, though we 
 knew little about it five years ago. It is tanned by 
 natives according to some method of vegetable tan- 
 ning not completely known at this time. While in 
 appearance it is not so attractive as some other moroc- 
 cos, because of blemishes due to carelessness in 
 handling and to the imperfect removal of some of 
 the hairs, it has been proved by the tests made under 
 the direction of Mr. Chivers to be stronger than all 
 other moroccos ; the inference is that it is more dur- 
 able. Until recently it has been very hard to obtain 
 in the United States. 
 
 Bock morocco is not a morocco but a split Persian 
 sheep so poor in quality that it is mentioned only to 
 be condemned. 
 
 CALFSKIN 
 
 Calfskin in all its various characters, such as di- 
 vinity, kip, marbled, mottled, smooth, tree, or just 
 plain calf is a very beautiful leather much used in the 
 past for binding books for individuals. For this pur- 
 pose it has, of late years, been crowded out by 
 Levant morocco. It has a soft, smooth surface which 
 disintegrates rapidly under the action of heat and gas
 
 MATERIALS 71 
 
 and has little strength even for temporary use. For 
 the library it is useless. 
 
 RUSSIA LEATHER 
 
 This is a brownish-red leather made from the 
 skins of different animals, tanned with willow bark 
 and filled with a preparation of birch oil which gives 
 it its peculiar odor. Neither in its genuine form nor 
 in imitation is it a useful leather for libraries. 
 
 SEALSKIN 
 
 Although experiments have been made with it in 
 some English libraries sealskin has never been much 
 used in the United States for library binding. It is 
 made from the skins of the hair seal, the supply com- 
 ing from all parts of the North Atlantic Ocean. 
 According to Mr. Douglas Cockerell and other bind- 
 ing experts in England, the skin is peculiarly suited 
 for library use. It is reported to be a hard-wearing 
 leather, tough and pliable, even in quality so that no 
 part of the skin must be discarded because too thin 
 or too weak, and possessing a beautiful grain. The 
 price ranges from a point somewhat higher than that 
 of the poorer moroccos to one somewhat lower than 
 the higher prices. Unfortunately it can be easily 
 imitated. 
 
 VELLUM 
 
 Probably no discussion of leather is complete 
 without mentioning vellum, a binding material which 
 does not resemble leather, but which nevertheless is 
 made from calfskin or sometimes from goat skin. It
 
 72 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 is prepared by the use of lime, and as far as the actual 
 wear on flat surface is concerned, is perhaps better 
 than any leather. It is, however, very susceptible to 
 moisture, which makes it warp ; and to light, which 
 makes it hard and brittle. Since it is very hard, does 
 not bend easily and is hard to work, its chief use is 
 on the corners of books to protect them and make 
 them less likely to break or rub. Large libraries have 
 used it somewhat for this purpose, but the use is dying 
 out. 
 
 In making a study of leathers it is well to obtain 
 samples of all kinds, including those which are un- 
 suitable for library use, and to examine them care- 
 fully, noting the appearance of the grain, thickness 
 of skin, flexibility, and softness of surface. Perhaps 
 more money can be wasted through ignorance of the 
 comparative values of different kinds of leather 
 which it is permissible to use in library binding, than 
 in mismanagement of any other part of binding. 
 
 CLOTH 
 
 Cloth is fully as important as leather in the econ- 
 omy of binding. Several years ago it was the custom 
 to bind periodicals and other books which were used 
 comparatively seldom in leather, while fiction, juve- 
 nile and other books which wore out quickly were 
 bound in cloth. Recently the opposite course has 
 been more favored. Books which receive unusually 
 hard usage and are in the hands of readers con- 
 stantly are bound in leather; while those which are 
 used seldom, including periodicals, are bound in some
 
 MATERIALS 73 
 
 kind of cloth. Without doubt the change is a wise 
 one. Even the best of leather disintegrates in time 
 under the action of heat, gas, light, etc., and to-day 
 many a volume bound in leather ten or fifteen years 
 ago has parted from its sides, necessitating rebinding 
 or recovering. Had it been bound in a good quality 
 of cloth it would to-day be in good condition, and 
 probably would remain in good condition for a hun- 
 dred years. It requires considerable courage to 
 change the binding of a good set of a standard peri- 
 odical, such as the Atlantic or Harper's, from an 
 attractive half morocco binding to an unattractive 
 buckram. Unquestionably, if economy is an object, 
 the change should be made, except possibly in the 
 case of a library which uses these periodicals daily. 
 Every librarian must decide each case for himself 
 strictly according to the use the set is to receive, 
 always bearing in mind the fact that leather disin- 
 tegrates with time, whereas cloth does not unless 
 exposed to excessive moisture. 
 
 No cloth which is suitable for library use is per- 
 fectly satisfactory because it has not the strength of 
 good leather, cannot be used advantageously on very 
 heavy books, soils easily and with use grows soft and 
 flabby, especially along the joints. But on the other 
 hand even those not suitable for libraries which are 
 used by the publisher on cheap books are much bet- 
 ter than poor grades of leathers, such as skiver, bock, 
 buffing, etc. 
 
 The requisite qualities of a good cloth are: 
 
 (a) Endurance when folded back and forth in
 
 74 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 the same place, so that it may withstand the wear at 
 the joint caused by opening the book. 
 
 (fr) Smoothness, so that there will be a compar- 
 atively small amount of friction when withdrawing a 
 book from between two others on the shelf. 
 
 (c*) Ability to withstand constant rubbing back 
 and forth on tables. 
 
 (d) Color that is fast when exposed to light; if 
 possible it should be fast to water also, though this 
 is less important. 
 
 (?) Color should be dyed in the piece, not 
 pressed in by machinery. 
 
 Many cloths have some of these qualities but few 
 have all of them. So far as is known to the writer 
 only the grade of cloth described on page 77 has the 
 last qualification. 
 
 Practically all cloth used in the United States is 
 made of cotton. The best cloths are manufactured by 
 The Holliston Mills, Norwood, Mass. ; The Inter- 
 laken Mills, New York City; The Joseph Bancroft & 
 Sons Company, Wilmington, Del., and by the Win- 
 terbottom Company and the Manchester Book Cloth 
 Company in England. Since a number of grades are 
 made in several different patterns and a great num- 
 ber of shades for each grade and each pattern, a 
 variety of choice is permitted. As a matter of 
 fact, however, most librarians select a good grade 
 with a regular weave and confine themselves to a few 
 standard shades, such as dark green, brown, red, dark 
 blue, and tan. 
 
 Since the strength of the warp is much greater
 
 MATERIALS 75 
 
 than that of the weft, it is advisable when possible to 
 cover books with the warp running across the cover. 
 This, however, may entail some hardship on the 
 binder for it may frequently happen that in order to 
 cut his cover economically he must make the warp 
 run lengthwise of the book. If a strong cloth is used 
 the advantage is not great enough to be insisted upon. 
 Each of the American firms mentioned makes 
 three distinct grades, all of which libraries may use. 
 Each firm uses a different name for each grade. In 
 other words, there are no general names which can 
 be used for the corresponding grade in all makes. 
 Therefore for the purposes of this chapter these 
 cloths will be considered under the heads of Grades 
 i, 2 and 3, but it must be remembered that this is an 
 arbitrary designation not known to the trade. Under 
 each grade will be given the specific names used by 
 the three manufacturers. 
 
 GRADE i ,*-" 
 
 Grade one of cloth, the cheapest that a librarian 
 may use, is not made of the best quality of cotton 
 thread and should never be used under any circum- 
 stances for full binding. It may be used on the sides 
 of books bound in leather ; if this be done the corners 
 should be covered with vellum, for this cloth does not 
 withstand hard usage and is likely to fray at the cor- 
 ners. It is a cloth commonly used by publishers, but 
 should be used sparingly by the librarian. "Art vel- 
 lum" made by the Interlaken Mills, "Aldine vellum"
 
 76 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 made by the Holliston Mills, and "Linen finish" made 
 by the Joseph Bancroft & Sons Company, come with- 
 in this grade. 
 
 GRADE 2 
 
 (a) Grade two is made of a better grade of 
 cotton and with a closer weave than the preceding, 
 but is not sufficiently strong to be used for full bind- 
 ing. It can be used more satisfactorily than the pre- 
 ceding on the sides of books bound in leather or duck. 
 In common with all cloths, except the buckram made 
 according to the government specifications (which 
 will be discussed later), the different colors are not 
 made, as one might suppose, by dyeing the cloth after 
 it is woven, but by mixing the color with the sizing 
 or starch which is used in finishing the cloth, and 
 pressing it into the cloth by machinery. As a natural 
 result the color rubs off with wear and the natural 
 gray of the original cloth as first woven appears. 
 "Art canvas" made by the Interlaken Mills, "Classic 
 buckram" made by the Holliston Mills, and "Polished 
 buckram," by the Joseph Bancroft & Sons Company 
 come within this grade. 
 
 (b) Buckram. Under the name of buckram 
 various grades of cloth are manufactured which 
 resemble to a greater or less degree those mentioned 
 under Grade 2 (a). Generally it is a coarsely woven 
 cloth stiffened with glue or sizing, and the term orig- 
 inally indicated that the cloth was made of linen. At 
 the present time linen buckram made in England can 
 be obtained, but all that is manufactured in the United
 
 MATERIALS 77 
 
 States is made of cotton. Linen buckram costs much 
 more than cotton and it is doubtful if it is any more 
 serviceable. All of the three manufacturers men- 
 tioned make buckrams. 
 
 GRADE 3 
 
 Prior to 1907 the Congressional set of govern- 
 ment documents distributed to the depository libra- 
 ries had been bound in sheepskin and the leather on 
 the volumes had disintegrated so much as to make the 
 set a hard one to care for. In 1907 the Congressional 
 Printing Investigation Commission asked librarians 
 of depository libraries to suggest, without considering 
 cost, suitable binding materials for Government Doc- 
 uments. The number of replies received was 124, 
 embodying suggestions as follows : full sheep, 1 1 ; 
 half-russia, 78 ; cloth, 25 ; buckram, 70 ; linen duck, 
 20; canvas, 19. Some librarians expressed more than 
 one preference, so that the total number o'f prefer- 
 ences was greater than the total of those replying. 
 Most of those who favored sheep did so because of 
 their desire for uniformity. Those who favored half- ' 
 russia undoubtedly desired half American russia, or 
 cowhide. 134 expressed preference for some form of 
 cloth. 
 
 After receiving the replies from librarians the 
 Printing Investigation Commission obtained samples 
 of cloth from various cloth manufacturers in the 
 United States and the Bureau of Standards made a 
 series of chemical and physical tests to determine the 
 durability of these cloths. Chemical tests were made
 
 78 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 to discover whether the colors were fast when ex- 
 posed to light. It is to be regretted perhaps that no 
 tests were made to determine whether the cloths were 
 fast to water and that this qualification was not in- 
 cluded in the final specifications. Admitting, how- 
 ever, that a cloth which is fast to sun and water both 
 is a valuable cloth for bookbinding, it is evident that 
 the quality of fastness to water is not a vitally im- 
 portant one for cloth used in the United States. The 
 total number of books injured by water is so small as 
 to make insistence upon this quality entirely unneces- 
 sary. If books become so soiled that they need to be 
 washed they should be bound in water-proof cloth. 
 
 Because many volumes of Government Documents 
 are sent to Porto Rico and the Philippines where in- 
 sects eat almost anything of an animal or vegetable 
 character, the desirability of the cloth as an article of 
 diet for insects, was also tested. 
 
 The physical tests indicated: 
 
 a. Number of threads per inch of warp and weft. 
 
 b. Absorption of moisture. 
 
 c. Weight per yard. 
 
 d. Tensile strength. 
 
 e. Amount of stretch. 
 
 /. Amount of friction developed by rubbing two 
 pieces of cloth together. 
 
 This test was made because the friction developed 
 in taking a book from between two others is an im- 
 portant matter when a shelf is full of books. If the 
 friction is great the wear on the back of the book is 
 correspondingly excessive.
 
 MATERIALS 79 
 
 g. Endurance when folded back and forth in the 
 same place. 
 
 h. Endurance under extraordinary conditions of 
 rubbing. 
 
 Some of these qualities, such as tensile strength, 
 amount of stretch, etc., were comparatively unimpor- 
 tant, but the tests for all were severe and contributed 
 much to our knowledge of the qualities which should 
 enter into the composition of durable book cloths. 
 
 After a very careful consideration of the results 
 of the tests and a thorough examination of the 
 samples submitted, a committee of librarians and 
 government officials unanimously chose three samples 
 as the best of all those submitted by the manufactur- 
 ers. Of these three samples the cloth numbered 666 
 was considered the most satisfactory. 
 
 Although these three samples were excellent, they 
 all had one defect the color was pressed in by 
 machinery, not dyed in the piece. After various ex- 
 periments had been made by the manufacturers this 
 defect was remedied. The Government Printing 
 Office then advertised for bids on cloths which would 
 meet the Specifications drawn up by the Bureau of 
 Standards (See Appendix A). Since that time all 
 the Government documents which continue the old 
 sheepbound set have been sent to depository libraries 
 bound in cloth made according to these specifications. 
 
 This cloth is known sometimes as Government 
 Specification Cloth, but is manufactured under the 
 specific name of "Library buckram" by the Holliston 
 Mills, "Art buckram" by the Interlaken Mills, and
 
 80 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 "Legal buckram" by the Joseph Bancroft & Sons 
 Company. The first two are made in pieces about 
 40 yards long and 38 inches wide, the Bancroft cloth 
 in pieces 43 yards long and 43 inches wide. It must 
 be admitted that this cloth is not quite so attractive 
 in appearance as ( some of the old cloths which are 
 not so durable. Some binders claim that it is hard 
 to use. On the whole, however, it supplies a long 
 felt want and is the strongest cloth made that is at all 
 attractive in appearance. 
 
 DUCK 
 
 Duck or canvas, a rough, heavy cloth much the 
 same in quality as sail cloth, is the strongest cloth 
 used in binding, but has some very decided drawbacks 
 which militate against its use, except when the ques- 
 tion of strength overshadows all others. It always 
 makes an unattractive-looking volume some of the 
 more fastidious librarians rebel against its use; and 
 it readily absorbs dirt and moisture, making it dis- 
 agreeable to handle if the book has been much used. 
 Duck having a double twisted thread in the weft is 
 much more compact and absorbs dirt and moisture 
 much less rapidly than other kinds. It should be 
 used on the backs (never for full binding) of news- 
 papers and such periodicals as are too heavy to put 
 in library or legal buckram. 
 
 IMPERIAL MOROCCO CLOTH 
 
 Imperial morocco cloth, manufactured by the Win- 
 terbottom Book Cloth Company in England, is made
 
 MATERIALS 8l 
 
 of linen thread and finished with a grain to resemble 
 leather. The kind most used in the United States 
 resembles a straight-grained morocco. It is an excel- 
 lent cloth in appearance, as well as in durability, but 
 its cost is 50% greater than that of the Government 
 Specification Cloth. It may be used on semi-popular 
 books which will not receive a great amount of use, 
 but which should be as attractive in appearance as 
 possible. 
 
 WATER-PROOF CLOTHS 
 
 There are several cloths which are water-proof 
 and therefore easily cleaned when the covers become 
 soiled. The best of these are durabline, used exclu- 
 sively by Cedric Chivers; rexine and pluviusin, used 
 almost exclusively in England; keratol, made in 
 Newark, New Jersey; and fabrikoid, made by the 
 du Pont Powder Company, Wilmington, Delaware. 
 All of these cloths are said to be acid, alkali and germ 
 proof, do not absorb grease and can be washed with 
 soap and water. They are strong, durable cloths, but 
 they have at first a disagreeable odor, are hard to 
 work and hard to letter in gold. In the application 
 of paste to most waterproof cloths, either in the 
 process of binding or in attaching labels to the back, 
 it is first necessary to break down the surface of the 
 cloth or the paste will not hold. This disadvantage 
 no longer exists in the case of fabrikoid. Keratol and 
 fabrikoid are made to imitate leather and are frankly 
 sold as such. Probably the use of these cloths in 
 libraries will always be comparatively small. Because
 
 82 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 they can be easily cleaned they may be used on the 
 sides of juvenile books, and in rare cases for full 
 binding. 
 
 GLUE 
 
 No very definite rules can be laid down as to what 
 kind of glue should be used. The matter must be left 
 largely in the hands of the binder, who must see that 
 it is strong, yet flexible; not too poor in quality nor 
 yet the most expensive kind which is generally used 
 on furniture. This is too brittle for bookbinding use. 
 
 The best glue for bookbinding is made from skins 
 and shows a dark wine color in the cake. Light 
 colored glues are made chiefly from bones and are 
 not usually so good. To prepare glue for use, soak 
 small pieces in water over night and in the morning 1 
 melt in the glue pot. It should never be boiled. A 
 careful binder will see that utensils re kept clean and 
 that glue is used in the proper thickness. 
 
 Flexible glue, which does not become too hard 
 either before or after use, is made by mixing glycerine 
 with good glue. It has no special advantages for use 
 by binders, but can be used in the library itself for 
 some of the repairs which assistants may have to make. 
 
 PASTE 
 
 (For paste used in mending, see p. 167). 
 
 The best paste is that made in the ordinary way 
 with flour and water. The paste should be fresh, for 
 if it is not a certain fermentation takes place which 
 is injurious to the book, especially to leather.
 
 MATERIALS 83 
 
 BOARDS 
 
 Not the least important part of the make-up of a 
 finished book are the boards forming the sides. There 
 are practically four grades of boards which are known 
 as strawboards; binders, cloth or millboards; semi- 
 tar, and tar -boards. The cheapest grade is the straw- 
 board, for which there is no place in library work. 
 
 Mill or cloth boards, used for practically all 
 library work, are generally made from waste papers 
 of all kinds, though some may have an admixture of 
 rags. Clay is also mixed with the waste paper pulp 
 and the whole subjected to heavy pressure in the final 
 stages of manufacture. They are made in two sizes, 
 20x30 and 23x29 inches, and are put up in 5o-pound 
 bundles, the number of sheets in the bundle indicat- 
 ing the thickness of the board. The thickest is a 
 No. 12 which has 12 sheets in a 5o-pound bundle. 
 They may have as many as 70 sheets in a bundle, 
 which makes a very thin board. A 20 or 25 board 
 should be used for fiction and juvenile books and 
 a 1 6 or 1 8 for heavier books such as magazines. 
 .Prices of good cloth boards run from $40 to $50 a 
 ton. 
 
 Semi-tar boards, made from better grade stock 
 than mill board, should have in their composition a 
 certain amount of rags and hemp or naval cordage. 
 They come in the same sizes and weights, costing 
 about $70 a ton. 
 
 Tar boards are the best boards obtainable. Made 
 of naval cordage, they are very tough and hard to 
 work. Many of them are allowed to season, in much
 
 84 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 the same way as lumber seasons, in order to prevent 
 warping. They are much too expensive for library 
 use, sometimes costing as much as $110 a ton. 
 
 The matter of boards is not one about which the 
 librarian need exercise great watchfulness. Binders 
 generally use a very good quality, though they some- 
 times use too thin a board on a heavy book, such as 
 a newspaper or large folio. In such cases a board 
 of suitable thickness can be made by pasting or gluing 
 two or more together. 
 
 THREAD 
 
 At one time there was no question but that the 
 best thread to be used in binding was linen. In the 
 light of present knowledge it may be doubted if this 
 is true under all circumstances. All commercially 
 bound books, without exception, are sewed with cot- 
 ton thread. Even such large books as the Century 
 Dictionary, Webster's Dictionary and the United 
 States Catalog of 1912 are sewed with cotton thread. 
 Since it was unquestionably the aim of the publishers 
 of all these books to issue them in the strongest pos- 
 sible bindings, it is reasonable to suppose that linen 
 would have been used if it were really the best for 
 the purpose. The main reason linen thread has been 
 advised for so long is because its tensile strength is 
 much greater than that of cotton. On the other hand, 
 it is just as true that what we may call the fraying 
 resistance of a cotton thread is greater than that of 
 linen. Take two threads of the same size, one cotton 
 and the other linen, make a loop of each thread with
 
 MATERIALS 5 
 
 one inside the other, saw back and forth, and the 
 cotton will always cut the linen thread. Furthermore, 
 linen thread deteriorates in quality unless very care- 
 fully stored. The publishers soon discovered these 
 facts, and since tensile strength is not an important 
 attribute in a thread that is being used -in a book 
 sewing-machine, they use a cotton thread with thor- 
 oughly satisfactory results. 
 
 In the case of library binding, however, the books 
 are always sewed by hand and the sewer, as she 
 draws the thread tight, is obliged to use some 
 strength ; for this reason tensile strength is an impor- 
 tant attribute. Hayes' Irish linen thread is generally 
 specified. The Barbour thread is referred to by Mr. 
 Dana and by others, but the writer is not familiar 
 with its use. 
 
 Other materials used in binding are gold leaf, 
 paper for end papers, tape, headband's, cord and 
 various concoctions used in finishing the books. Gold 
 leaf should be 18 to 22 karat, and neither aluminum 
 nor silver leaf should be used. Paper for end papers 
 will vary somewhat with the size of the book, but 
 should never be lighter in weight than a ob-pound 
 manila. Large libraries may find it desirable to have 
 an end paper specially made for their own use. Tapes 
 should be linen and not over three-eighths of an inch 
 wide. Cord for use in sewing in the regular way 
 (not overcasting) is a soft twine which can be 
 obtained from all dealers in bookbinding supplies. 
 For all books less than twelve inches in height use 
 four-ply cord ; for larger books, five-ply.
 
 CHAPTER V 
 
 After the librarian has definitely decided upon the 
 binder whom he wishes to employ he must, especially 
 in dealing with binders who are not accustomed to 
 library work, draw up specifications as to ways in 
 which he wishes different classes of books bound. If 
 he has employed a binder who thoroughly under- 
 stands library binding, he may make use of the 
 binder's knowledge in drawing up the specifications. 
 Under certain circumstances it may be wise to enter 
 into a contract with the binder, but ordinarily in the 
 United States such a course will not be necessary. 
 After the specifications have been prepared and a 
 schedule of prices agreed upon, the librarian always 
 has the right to refuse to pay for books not bound 
 according to specifications. Therefore, a definite 
 legal contract is not necessary. The librarian, ex- 
 cept in the case of a few libraries which according to 
 law must give their work to state officials, is always 
 at liberty to take his custom from one binder and 
 give it to another. Thus sufficient pressure is brought 
 to bear on the binder. 
 
 Although the present chapter gives definite speci- 
 fications for the binding of various classes of books, 
 it is always wise to show a certain latitude in the use
 
 5 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 of specifications. Local conditions, the papers used in 
 bookmaking which seem to become poorer and poorer 
 with each succeeding year, and the kind of a library 
 which is to use the specifications all these must be 
 taken into consideration when specifications are drawn 
 up. Moreover, the best specifications will accomplish 
 little if they are not followed by the binder in a work- 
 manlike manner, while good workmanship will some- 
 times make up for omission of important details in the 
 specifications. 
 
 In the main, it will be found that the following 
 specifications may be used as a guide, except possibly 
 in the case of some reference and college libraries 
 which do not issue books for home use. It has 
 seemed best to place first general specifications which 
 apply to all books, followed by additional specifica- 
 tions for each kind of books treated. The way in 
 which these specifications are carried out is described 
 in the chapter on Processes. 
 
 1. The binder is responsible for all books con- 
 signed to his care and must replace or pay for all 
 books lost or injured. When one considers the large 
 number of volumes passing through a bindery, com- 
 ing from many different libraries, the number of 
 books for which the binder is unable to account is 
 surprisingly small. 
 
 2. The librarian is the judge of whether the 
 book is bound according to the specifications. Since 
 he has submitted the specifications and the binder has
 
 SPECIFICATIONS 89 
 
 agreed to them he should be the sole judge of the 
 result. 
 
 3. The binder will be allowed to depart from any 
 specification if it is desirable in the interests of good 
 binding. He must, however, prove that h^is justified 
 in so doing. 
 
 4. Books must be paid for according to a sched- 
 ule of prices agreed upon by the binder and librarian. 
 
 5. The size should be determined by measuring 
 at the back of the volume after it is bound. It might 
 be wiser, perhaps, to measure the book before the 
 boards are put on, so that binders would be sure to 
 trim the book as little as possible. It is the universal 
 custom, however, to pay according to the measure of 
 the book with the boards on. This may possibly 
 tempt the binder to increase the square of the book 
 just enough to group it with the next larger size so 
 that he can charge more for it. 
 
 6. All items not covered in the schedule of 
 prices may be charged for at the regular rates of the 
 binder for such work. 
 
 7. All books not oversewed are to be sewed ail- 
 along with Hayes' Irish linen thread, suiting the size 
 of the thread to the requirements of the book; No. 25 
 for light, No. 20 for medium and No. 16 for heavy 
 sections. 
 
 8. Cloth must be used for sides of all books 
 bound in half-leather or half-duck. Never use mar- 
 bled paper except occasionally on newspapers. 
 
 9. Unless otherwise specified, cloth which con- 
 forms to the specifications of the Bureau of Stand-
 
 90 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 ards, or Imperial morocco cloth, must be used for full 
 binding. For sides of leather bound books a some- 
 what cheaper grade may be used. 
 
 10. Duck should have a twisted, double thread 
 in the weft. 
 
 11. Moroccos or pigskins must be guaranteed by 
 the manufacturer to be free-from-acid. 
 
 12. Glue must be best quality of binders' or flex- 
 ible glue, and must be used sparingly. 
 
 13. Poor materials of any kind must not be used. 
 
 14. In taking books apart, all old glue, paste, 
 back-lining, paper, etc., should be carefully removed. 
 
 15. The binder should expect to do a certain 
 amount of mending of torn pages and guarding of 
 weak signatures, but should be allowed to charge 
 extra when the amount is excessive. 
 
 1 6. The text of all books must be collated by 
 binder and imperfect books returned to the library. 
 (See under Processes, Collation, p. 15). 
 
 17. All illustrations of whatever character printed 
 on single leaves must be guarded with thin, tough 
 paper and the guard folded around the adjoining 
 sections. 
 
 Some librarians and binders advocate the use of 
 cloth guards but this seems hardly necessary. The 
 cloth guards tend to swell the back of the book, espe- 
 cially if there be many plates, while the thin, tough 
 paper is strong enough for ordinary books. Folded 
 plates should never be sewed through the middle of 
 the fold, but should be mounted on guards so that the 
 plates will open out nearly flat when the book is
 
 SPECIFICATIONS 91 
 
 opened. Folded maps, or other folded plates which 
 may be consulted often should, unless otherwise speci- 
 fied, be guarded with cloth which is as wide as the 
 book, so that they may be thrown entirely outside the 
 book and lie flat on a table. 
 
 1 8. Illustrations which are folded more than 
 once, such as maps, should be carefully cut and 
 mounted on thin cloth in such a way as to allow for 
 the folding to come on the cloth alone, not on the 
 paper. 
 
 19. Stitching (that is, sewing signatures length- 
 wise with a sewing-machine) or old-fashioned whip- 
 stitching, is not permitted for any books ; with the 
 possible exception of newspapers. 
 
 20. In sewing three bands or tapes must be used 
 for eight-inch books, four for twelve-inch, etc. 
 
 21. Tapes, or bands, and back-lining must pro- 
 ject at least an inch and a quarter on each side of the 
 book. 
 
 22. All books should be lined on the back with 
 canton flannel as described in the chapter on Pro- 
 cesses, except in a few cases where it may be advis- 
 able to use duck or a flesher. This eliminates lacing- 
 on of boards. 
 
 23. Adjoining leaves of fly leaves and end papers 
 must always be pasted together. 
 
 24. Books must be trimmed as little as possible. 
 
 25. All books should have rounded corners. 
 
 26. All books must have French joints. 
 
 27. All books, unless otherwise specified, will be 
 fastened finally into the covers by pasting down end
 
 92 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 papers. Tight-back books will in addition have the 
 back glued to the book. 
 
 28. Books should be loose-back unless otherwise 
 specified. 
 
 29. Edges should be sprinkled unless the library 
 specifies gilding on top. The color used may be 
 varied to harmonize with the color of the book. 
 
 30. Books must be pressed until thoroughly dry. 
 
 31. Binders must keep a record of each book, 
 whether periodical or not, which has a volume 
 number. 
 
 This record, commonly known as a "rub" or "rub- 
 off," shows the size of the book, kind of binding and 
 exact lettering. Whenever other volumes of the 
 same work or same periodical are received they will 
 be bound according to this record, unless the librarian 
 has specified a different material, or different letter- 
 ing. In such a case the matter must be referred to 
 the librarian before the book is bound. If a binder 
 receives a book with a volume number and has no 
 record of previous volumes, he should ask the libra- 
 rian for a sample volume, unless it is obviously a 
 book for which there could be no sample, such as the 
 first volume of a periodical giving contemporary 
 dates. 
 
 32. The binder is expected to paste in book- 
 pockets and book-plates when furnished by the library 
 but may charge extra for the work. 
 
 33. The best gold leaf must be used in lettering 
 unless cover is light enough in color to take ink. 
 Leather labels should never be used.
 
 SPECIFICATIONS 93 
 
 FICTION AND JUVENILE BOOKS 
 
 It seems to be fairly well proven that all fiction 
 and juvenile books should be bound in some kind of 
 leather, preferably cowhide. 1 Objections to this are 
 heard from time to time, but the objections come 
 chiefly from the large steel towns where the sulphur 
 in the air has a bad effect on leathers. In most com- 
 munities leather will outwear cloth and in any event 
 cloth becomes shabby, even when perfectly strong, 
 much more quickly than leather. When the French 
 joint is used the leather need not be pared and ordi- 
 narily will outwear the paper of the book. 
 
 Follow general specifications as outlined above, 
 supplemented by the following: 
 
 1. Books should be bound in one-half cowhide 
 (American russia). Roan may be used if the libra- 
 rian is sure that it is good. 
 
 2. Fly-leaves should be made of white book 
 paper, 70 pounds to the ream and guarded with 
 jaconet. 
 
 It is apparent that when fly-leaves are guarded 
 with cloth they are sewed as a separate section and 
 not tipped on as is done in ordinary binding. Since 
 practically all fiction and juvenile books are over- 
 sewed, it will not be necessary to carry the guard 
 around to the inner side of the fold. 
 
 3. End papers may be made of paper specially 
 made for the binder, but it should be equal in strength 
 to an 8o-pound manila paper and should be guarded 
 
 1 See footnote, page 66.
 
 94 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 with jaconet on the outside of the fold in the same 
 way as fly-leaves. 
 
 4. If book is not oversewed the first and last sec- 
 tions must be guarded with jaconet. 
 
 5. Nearly all books should be sewed with some 
 modern method of overcasting. 
 
 It is probable that in every lot of books sent to the 
 binder there will be some fiction and juvenile books 
 which could be sewed in the regular way through the 
 signatures either on bands or on tapes, but the num- 
 ber is so small that the binder finds it easier to sew all 
 the books alike. In any event only those which have 
 the backs of the sections unbroken the entire length 
 and which, in addition, are seldom used, should be 
 sewed in the regular way. 
 
 NON-FICTION 
 
 1. Books should be bound in full cloth. 
 
 2. .Books in which the backs of sections are not 
 injured, or which cannot be easily mended may be 
 sewed regularly. The rest must be oversewed. 
 
 3. In all other respects the preceding specifica- 
 tions should be followed. 
 
 PERIODICALS 
 
 There is no place in a small library where good 
 judgment will do more to make the library efficient 
 at a minimum cost than in the binding of periodicals. 
 The use of libraries for reference purposes is increas- 
 ing and the use of periodicals is made easy by means 
 of the periodical indexes. The enthusiastic librarian
 
 SPECIFICATIONS 95 
 
 who wishes to answer all questions will be tempted to 
 bind more periodicals than are really needed, thus im- 
 pairing the efficiency of the book fund. On the other 
 hand, to some the cost of binding may seem so great 
 that some useful periodicals will remain unbound. 
 But it is not necessary to throw away unbound peri- 
 odicals. If they are to be used only now and then in 
 reference work, it is' a good plan to wrap them in 
 stout manila paper with stiff boards on the outside, 
 letter carefully on the back and file away on the 
 shelves in their regular places among other periodicals. 
 Supplement the general specifications by the fol- 
 lowing : 
 
 1. Fly-leaves should be made of white book 
 paper, 80 pounds to the ream, guarded with jaconet 
 on both sides. 
 
 2. End papers may be made of special papers 
 used by the binder, but it is wise to have a i co-pound 
 manila guarded with jaconet on the outside and also 
 on the inside of the fold. 
 
 3. First and last sections must be guarded with 
 jaconet. 
 
 4. Books 10 inches in height should be sewed 
 regularly on four bands or on tape's one-quarter of 
 an inch wide; larger volumes on five bands or tapes. 
 Sew ail-along, passing needle through center of tapes. 
 
 5. A millboard as heavy as the weight of the 
 book will allow must be used. 
 
 6. '(a) Books should be bound in full cloth 
 made according to the specifications of the Bureau of 
 Standards. As light colors, which may be lettered
 
 >6 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 in ink, show dirt very readily it seems better to use 
 a dark color and letter in gold. 
 
 (b) In large reference or college libraries there 
 are certain periodicals that receive constant use. It 
 would be a mistake to bind such volumes in cloth, 
 because no cloth will endure the wear that they 
 receive. They should be bound in leather, preferably 
 Turkey or Niger morocco. On no account should 
 American russia be used. 
 
 7. If leather is used the sides should be covered 
 with Bureau of Standards cloth. 
 
 NEWSPAPERS 
 
 Because newspapers are printed on wretched 
 paper which it is freely admitted will disintegrate in 
 a comparatively short time, the question when to bind 
 and when to throw away is a hard one to decide. For 
 the small library it is surely unwise to bind any except 
 the local paper, which will be used from time to time 
 for local history. In many cases it may be wiser 
 simply to wrap the volumes to protect them from the 
 light and file them chronologically. The librarian of 
 the large library, however, no matter how disgusted 
 he may be with the poor quality of paper used finds 
 it necessary to bind a number of newspapers. When 
 bound they will last twenty-five years or more, during 
 which time they are sure to be used sufficiently to 
 warrant binding. 
 
 Newspapers must be kept away from light, heat 
 and moisture. If possible, keep in a dark closet until
 
 SPECIFICATIONS 97 
 
 ready for binding. Publishers of local papers ought 
 to give a copy for binding. 
 
 1. Newspapers must be bound in one-half duck, 
 best quality. 
 
 It is never under any circumstances wise to bind 
 newspapers in leather. Duck, to be sure, gathers dirt 
 easily, but it seems to be the only material sufficiently 
 strong and long-lived for binding newspapers. 
 
 2. Fly-leaves and end papers should be made of 
 extra heavy paper well guarded inside and outside the 
 fold. 
 
 3. It is permissible to stitch sections lengthwise 
 before sewing regularly on bands, but oversewing is 
 preferable. 
 
 4. Boards of double thickness must be used. It 
 is best, perhaps, to make the boards by gluing or 
 pasting two boards of ordinary thickness together. 
 
 5. Corners should be covered with vellum tips. 
 
 6. Tight backs must be used. 
 
 7. Sides must be covered with paper. 
 
 This facilitates the handling of the volumes. If 
 cloth sides are used on newspapers it increases enor- 
 mously the labor in shelving them and even of using 
 them on ordinary library tables. In libraries that 
 can afford to shelve newspapers on patent shelving 
 with rollers, cloth sides are preferable. 
 
 8. Libraries that can afford it should use a fibre- 
 filling preservative on the edges. (See page 116 of 
 the Bulletin of the American Library Association for 
 1912.)
 
 9 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 REFERENCE BOOKS 
 
 Reference books should be bound in the same way 
 as fiction or juvenile books, except that morocco, in- 
 stead of cowhide, should be used for books constantly 
 handled. Books used only occasionally should be 
 covered with cloth made according to the Specifica- 
 tions of the Bureau of Standards. Very heavy, thick 
 volumes, such as dictionaries, should have all the 
 strengthening devices and especially should have the 
 bands and canton flannel on the back placed in split 
 boards or between two boards glued together. It is 
 impossible to bind such books too strongly. In rare 
 cases it may be well to sew heavy books constantly 
 used on raised bands, to have leather corners, and a 
 strip of leather along the bottom of each board. 
 
 LAW BOOKS 
 
 Some of the professions have conventional ways 
 of binding professional books. In the law, for ex- 
 ample, it was formerly customary to bind all law 
 books in full sheep of the natural color. When sheep 
 fell into disrepute, the law publishers began to sub- 
 stitute cloth similar in shade to the sheep generally 
 used a decided gain for law libraries. 
 
 Supplement the general specifications by the fol- 
 lowing: 
 
 1. End papers and fly-leaves must be guarded 
 with jaconet, as described in specifications for fiction 
 and juvenile books, page 93. 
 
 2. First and last sections must be guarded with 
 jaconet.
 
 SPECIFICATIONS 99 
 
 3. All maps and charts must be backed with 
 muslin and not folded unless necessary. 
 
 4. (a) Bancroft Legal buckram (the lightest 
 shade made), or Holliston Mills Library buckram 
 No. 32, should be used for covering. 
 
 (6) Books used constantly should be bound in 
 half Turkey morocco or Niger morocco. 
 
 MUSIC 
 
 1. The most essential quality of a well-bound 
 book of music is its ability to lie flat wherever 
 opened. It is unwise therefore to use any kind of 
 an overcast stitch in sewing. Regular sewing on 
 tapes, instead of bands, must be used. 
 
 2. The square at the bottom of the book should 
 be greater than at the top so that leaves will not 
 catch on the music-rack when turned over. 
 
 3. Imperial morocco cloth should be used for 
 covering. If hard usage is expected half cowhide, 
 with sides of some kind of washable cloth, is prefer- 
 able. 
 
 4. Part music for various instruments or solos 
 with accompaniment must have one strong binding 
 for the part which takes the most space, with pocket 
 on the inside of the back cover to hold the other 
 parts. If these are bulky compensating guards should 
 be inserted in the back of the book. 
 
 BOOKS OF ILLUSTRATIONS 
 Every library finds it necessary to bind a few 
 books, such as Racinet's "Le costume historique,"
 
 100 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 which have very little text and a great number of 
 illustrations. It is evident that the illustrations in 
 such books are most useful if kept in unbound form 
 in portfolios, but when kept in such a way they are 
 likely to be lost, torn, mutilated or misplaced. 
 
 1. Each plate should be guarded with thin, tough 
 paper and the guards overcast. 
 
 This insures a good strong sewing ; in addition the 
 guard forms a hinge where it meets the plate and the 
 plate will lie flat and can easily be examined when 
 the book is opened. 
 
 2. Because of the artistic nature of such books, 
 they should be bound in one-half morocco, taking 
 extra care to see that acid-free leather is used. 
 
 3. Canton flannel and bands, or tapes, should be 
 inserted bet wen split boards. If the book is very 
 heavy, it would be wise to line the back with duck or 
 a flesher rather than with canton flannel. 
 
 > 
 
 ' COMMERCIAL BINDING FOR REFERENCE BOOKS 
 
 While they are not a part of library binding, it 
 may not be amiss to include specifications for com- 
 mercial binding of heavy reference books, such as 
 dictionaries, cyclopedias, etc. It is done with the hope 
 that librarians will exert pressure upon the publishers 
 to induce them to adopt these or other specifications 
 which will produce equally good results. 
 
 i. Four tapes should be used in sewing; the tapes 
 must extend on each side of the book at least two 
 inches. The book should contain as manyl stitches 
 as possible, using the best four-strand cotton thread.
 
 SPECIFICATIONS >I 
 
 The thickness of the thread will depend somewhat 
 upon the number of pages in a signature. Books 
 should be sewed "all along" with no splitting of 
 signatures at head or tail. 
 
 2. First and last signatures should be reinforced 
 inside and outside of the fold with a strip of strong, 
 thin muslin which passes around the outside of the. 
 end papers. The English cloth called jaconet is the 
 best for this purpose. 
 
 3. The second signature and the next 'to the last 
 should be reinforced with muslin on the inside of the 
 fold. 
 
 4. The end papers should also be lined on the 
 inside. 
 
 5. Illustrations should be guarded with muslin 
 which is folded around the next signature. 
 
 6. Books should be lined with a medium grade 
 of canton flannel, with the fuzzy side to the back and 
 extending from one-half inch from the head to 
 within one-half inch of the tail of the book, lapping 
 over at least two inches on the side. 
 
 7. The flannel, together with the tapes, should 
 be inserted between split boards. 
 
 8. Over the canton flannel, but not extending 
 over to the sides, there should be pasted a good quality 
 of linen, rope or manila paper of sufficient thickness 
 to make the book firm. In putting on this lining 
 paper paste instead of glue must be used. 
 
 9. Volumes should have French joints. 
 
 10. The best quality millboard of suitable thick- 
 ness with rounded corners should be used.
 
 102 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 11. Leather should be made, if possible, accord- 
 ing to the specifications of the London Society of Arts. 
 Niger morocco is probably the best. Volumes should 
 have leather corners as well as backs. 
 
 12. For cloth sides, Winterbottom's Imperial 
 morocco cloth, Bancroft's Legal buckram, or Hollis- 
 ton's Library buckram should be used.
 
 CHAPTER VI 
 
 BINDING BEFORE PURCHASE AND 
 REINFORCING 
 
 One way of economizing in libraries is to buy 
 books that have been bound in strong binding before 
 they come to the library. It is not, however, a uni- 
 versal panacea which will reduce binding bills to a 
 minimum. On the contrary, if not used with caution, 
 this plan will result in the expenditure of large sums 
 of money for which the library will never receive a 
 return in actual wear of the books. Library binders 
 who adopt this scheme buy books in the sheets from 
 the publishers, put them into a strong binding and 
 sell them directly to the library. Mr. Cedric Chivers 
 of Bath, England, was the first to adopt this plan. 
 Later he started a bindery in this country, and since 
 then other binders have followed his practice. For 
 the librarian there are several advantages in this 
 method of buying books. 
 
 i. Books can be bound according to the library's 
 special needs before they have received any wear, 
 while the paper is fresh and clean. Books printed on 
 very thick, spongy paper must be sewed very strongly 
 and receive special reinforcements that are not neces- 
 sary on paper which is more suitable for binding. If 
 a good library binder buys the sheets from the pub-
 
 104 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 lishers, he can test the paper to see what kind of 
 treatment it should receive, and he can then bind it 
 suitably for library wear. If the book is used in the 
 original publishers' binding it deteriorates much more 
 rapidly than when properly bound at the beginning. 
 
 2. The book can remain in circulation at the 
 time when it is most needed. Formerly one of the 
 greatest trials in public libraries was the necessity 
 of withdrawing from the shelves practically all the 
 copies of a popular novel in order to send them to 
 the bindery where they remained from four to six 
 weeks, the public meanwhile hurling anathemas at the 
 librarian for not providing sufficient copies of the 
 book. Not only were the books out of circulation 
 when most needed, but much time was used in pre- 
 paring them for the bindery, checking them up on 
 return, putting on the library marks of ownership, 
 making cards, marking pockets, etc., all of which 
 added to the expense. Today, in the case of new 
 novels which are sure to be popular, such troubles 
 are unnecessary. Instead of buying the original pub- 
 lishers' binding, the wise librarian buys a sufficient 
 number of copies bound from the sheets ; if the bind- 
 ing is properly done, he need pay no more attention 
 to them until they are worn out. He has done what 
 he could to prevent the public from becoming dis- 
 satisfied, and he has saved the cost of the work 
 required to send them to the bindery. 
 
 3. Not only has he served his public better and 
 saved the time of assistants, but in most cases he has 
 actually saved money on his binding bills. Let us
 
 BINDING BEFORE PURCHASE I<>5 
 
 suppose that he pays $1.50 for a book bound from 
 the sheets; and suppose that he also buys a copy of 
 the same book in the publisher's cover at a cost of 
 $1.22, which, after it has been issued twenty times, 
 has to be bound at a cost of 50 cents, making a total 
 cost of $1.72. If they are issued the same number 
 of times there is a clear saving of 22 cents in favor 
 of the book bound from the sheets. As a matter of 
 fact, however, statistics kept by the Wilmington In- 
 stitute Free Library indicate that the first book will 
 be issued 125 times before it is discarded, and the 
 second 100 times twenty before binding and eighty 
 afterward. If this be true, it is clear that there is a 
 further saving, provided that both have to be replaced 
 when finally worn out. 
 
 While these advantages are well worth consider- 
 ing, the librarian should not necessarily get all his 
 books in this form. It is a plan which is pecu- 
 liarly advantageous in the case of fiction and those 
 few other books which are in constant use. In the 
 case of juvenile books one must be cautious. Juvenile 
 books, particularly books for boys, become soiled so 
 much more quickly than the adult books that they 
 frequently have to be discarded because they are dirty 
 rather than because they are worn out. If the books 
 were bound before purchase the library may have lost 
 money, because one can frequently buy a publisher's 
 book and rebind it more cheaply than he can purchase 
 the book bound from the sheets. * 
 
 Most books in the classes should be purchased in 
 the regular publisher's binding unless they are con-
 
 106 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 stantly used. In other words, the use a book is to 
 receive is the test of whether it should be bound from 
 the sheets before purchase. Having decided that the 
 use of a book warrants binding from the sheets, it is 
 well to consider other facts. 
 
 i. It may not always be wise to bind from the 
 sheets all the copies of a new book by a well-known 
 author whose works are always popular and likely to 
 continue so for years. If ten copies are approxi- 
 mately sufficient for use during the first year, it is 
 safe to say that in most cases they will be too many 
 for the needs of the library during the second and 
 third years. If they are bound in leather before pur- 
 chase they will not wear out and during the third 
 and succeeding years a number of them may be dead- 
 wood on the shelves. It is therefore wiser to buy a 
 few copies in leather binding and the others either 
 in a regular publishers' binding, or in some publish- 
 er's cover reinforced. When these volumes have 
 come to the point where they need binding the period 
 of greatest popularity may have passed and they 
 may be withdrawn, thus saving the library the expense 
 of binding. 
 
 2. When the book is finally worn out and must 
 be withdrawn from circulation, the question always 
 arises, must it be replaced with a new copy? The 
 majority of fiction and juvenile books so replaced 
 are books of wide popularity. Occasionally a book, 
 such as Henry James' "Princess Casamassima," or 
 W. D. Howells' "Modern instance," is replaced 
 because the library must have it on the shelves, not
 
 BINDING BEFORE PURCHASE 107 
 
 because it is popular. But ordinarily the popularity 
 of a book is the determining factor in replacing worn- 
 out copies. The decision to replace carries with it 
 the decision to keep a book on the shelves indefinitely. 
 Since the book has proved its worth and is to receive 
 hard wear, the reasons which prevailed against buying 
 it in a strong binding when it was new no longer 
 exist. The strongest binding that can be obtained 
 suited to the strength of the paper is none too strong. 
 
 Perhaps the most vehement objection to books 
 bound from the sheets comes from those librarians 
 who have a strong sense of aesthetic values and who 
 claim that these books are not so attractive to the 
 eyes as the regular books in their bright and gay 
 publishers' covers. The objection is valid. It must 
 be admitted that the leather-covered books have the 
 appearance of strength and serviceability, but not of 
 beauty. If a reader knows that he wishes a particular 
 book, he will not be prevented from taking it because 
 of its appearance, but if it is bound in leather and 
 he knows nothing about it, he will very likely pass 
 it over and select some book which has a bright, 
 attractive cover. This is true even of adults, while of 
 children it is doubly true. A large part of the popu- 
 larity of that well-known book, "Fighting a fire," is 
 due to the attractive cover which almost always excites 
 the interest of boys who happen to see it. 
 
 Although the first cost of books bound from the 
 sheets is always greater than that of books in the 
 regular publishers' covers, it is hoped that the econ- 
 omy of buying them under certain conditions has
 
 108 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 been made clear. There is, however, a cheaper way 
 of buying some books which one would otherwise 
 obtain in this form. Every year many copies of 
 popular fiction and juvenile books find their way to 
 the shelves of second-hand book dealers. Some of 
 these copies show signs of wear, while some of them 
 are in excellent condition. In any event it is always 
 wise to submit a list of replacements to some large 
 dealer in second-hand books; to buy such books as 
 may be obtained from him (generally at considerably 
 less than one-half the published price) ; and to send 
 them at once to a good library binder for rebinding 
 before placing upon the shelves of the library. In 
 this way one should get from 25 per cent to 33/^j per 
 cent of fiction replacements in a substantial binding 
 at a cost much less than the cost of a book in the 
 original publishers' binding. 
 
 For those who wish strong bindings, but who 
 wish them attractive also, reinforced bindings can be 
 recommended. Reinforced books are those which 
 have been strengthened either by the publishers in the 
 regular course of manufacture, or by some binder who 
 takes the book as it comes from the publisher, removes 
 the cover, strengthens the book and puts it back into 
 the same cover. A reinforced book generally appears 
 in the attractive publisher's cover, and it always ap- 
 pears in some form of cloth, never in leather. 
 
 Owing to the small number of times which books 
 in the original publishers' binding were issued, the
 
 REINFORCED BOOKS IOQ 
 
 committee on binding of the American Library Asso- 
 ciation made an effort in 1906 to induce the publishers 
 to issue a special edition for library use. As it was 
 recognized that the publishers would not take kindly 
 to elaborate specifications for stronger bindings, the 
 improvements asked for were made as few in number 
 as possible. They were the following: 
 
 1. Sewed on three tapes (very small books sewed 
 on two tapes). 
 
 2. First and last signatures reinforced with 
 muslin. 
 
 3. Cloth strip in joints pasted on fly leaf and 
 sewed through. 
 
 4. Thin strong muslin over backs. 
 
 An attempt to demand hand-sewed books was 
 abandoned when it was discovered that this stipula- 
 tion added greatly to the cost of the binding without 
 noticeably increasing its strength. The main strength 
 of a book bound according to these specifications lay 
 in the guarding of the first and last signatures. 
 
 The honor of issuing the first reinforced book for 
 library use belongs to Charles Scribner's Sons Co., 
 who in the summer of 1906 bound 1500 copies of 
 F. Hopkinson Smith's "Tides of Barnegat." Their 
 specifications, based on those submitted by the 
 A. L. A. committee on binding, required that: 
 
 1. Signatures contain not more than sixteen 
 pages ; 
 
 2. First and last signatures be guarded with 
 muslin before sewing;
 
 HO LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 3. First and last signatures be oversewed (actu- 
 ally they were run through a sewing machine) ; 
 
 4. Lining papers be guarded with strong drill 
 and sewed through; 
 
 5. The book be sewed on two tapes ; 
 
 6. Highest grade super be used for back-lining; 
 
 7. Books be glued to the back of the cover; 
 making a tight back book ; 
 
 8. Buckram be used for the covers instead of the 
 regular publisher's cover. 
 
 The extra cost of the book was ten cents, and it 
 was an excellent piece of work. In actual wear the 
 books far exceeded the hopes of those who favored 
 the plan, for they all went through the period of 
 greatest popularity without being withdrawn from 
 circulation. When they came to the point where they 
 could no longer be circulated, most of them were dis- 
 carded instead of being sent to the bindery. 
 
 The initial success of the plan induced other pub- 
 lishers to try the experiment. In 1908 one hundred 
 and twenty different books could be obtained in re- 
 inforced bindings from seventeen publishers. Among 
 these publishers were the firms of Century Company, 
 Harper, Houghton, Little Brown & Company, Mc- 
 Clurg, Putnam, Scribner's, Stokes, and Warne. Some 
 of these books were well-bound, the publishers evi- 
 dently making a conscientious effort to meet the 
 demands of the committee; others were makeshifts 
 not worth one-half the extra cost. 
 
 The success of "Tides of Barnegat" encouraged 
 Charles Scribner's Sons to give the experiment fur- 
 ther trial, and from time to time during a period of
 
 REINFORCED BOOKS I" 
 
 several months this firm issued books bound in this 
 way. In no case, however, was the initial success 
 repeated. After the experiments had been tried by 
 the different publishers for several months the ob- 
 stacles to the plan, several of which had been fore- 
 seen, grew greater rather than less, and in the end 
 the publishers gave up the plan of providing special 
 editions of new fiction and juvenile books for library 
 use. 
 
 The main obstacle to the successful culmination 
 of the plan lay in the inability of librarians to order 
 books before publication, and in the inability of pub- 
 lishers to make special editions after the book had 
 been published. The success of "Tides of Barnegat" 
 was due largely to the fact that the author and book 
 were well known in advance of publication. Libra- 
 rians knew at once that they wanted the book and the 
 orders were filed promptly. In the case of nearly 
 every other book which Scribner published in this way 
 librarians could not decide until they had actually 
 seen the book, or at least had seen reviews of it. 
 Quite naturally they sent in few orders for the books. 
 On the other hand Scribner did not care to bind a 
 large number of books in special binding unless they 
 had some assurance that the books would be sold; 
 and they could not at any time afford to manufac- 
 ture a very small number. It seemed impossible to 
 bridge this gap which existed between the publisher 
 and the librarian. 
 
 Other reasons which worked against the success 
 of the plan were: 
 
 (a) The apathy of the library world in general.
 
 "2 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 In spite of efforts made both by publishers and by 
 those librarians specially interested; in spite of the 
 proved success and economy of the best reinforced 
 bindings, librarians in general paid little attention to 
 them. 
 
 (b) The opposition of booksellers. This oppo- 
 sition was not violent at any time; but a special 
 edition for one class of buyers inevitably entailed 
 more labor upon jobbers and booksellers with no 
 financial return, since there was no discount on the 
 ice. extra cost. It followed that orders from libra- 
 rians for the special library editions were filled by 
 some jobbers with regular editions; and the time re- 
 .quired to exchange the copy of a regular edition for 
 one of a special edition was generally sufficient to 
 prevent the librarian from returning the books. Had 
 it been possible to have one central bureau to bunch 
 orders and to distribute them, greater success might 
 have resulted. 
 
 While the effort to induce publishers to issue 
 special library editions and to keep them in stock 
 was a failure, there were nevertheless good results 
 from the venture. While most of the commercial 
 bindings are no better to-day than they were ten 
 years ago, yet the publishers know that something 
 better is needed for library use. Small books which 
 are used by children and receive hard usage are as a 
 rule much stronger bound than formerly, and will 
 last as long as they are needed. As one direct result 
 of the agitation, the well-known Everyman's set can 
 now be obtained in a library binding. Certain large
 
 REINFORCED BOOKS "3 
 
 reference books, such as Webster's and the Century 
 dictionaries, U. S. Catalog, etc., have been put into 
 the strongest possible binding. In these cases the 
 publishers have tried to meet the demands of libra- 
 rians. 
 
 When the ^publishers ceased to make special edi- 
 tions for libraries several library binders undertook 
 to supply books in this form. Their method was to 
 buy the books from the publishers, remove the cov- 
 ers, resew the books in the most approved library 
 style and replace the books in the publisher's covers. 
 When this cover wears out the sewing is so good 
 that it is only necessary to recover either with a reg- 
 ular leather-back binder's cover, or with a home- 
 made cloth cover. By this method the librarian is 
 assured of a book in the same cover as the regular 
 edition, the necessity of sending orders in advance of 
 publication is obviated, and the publishers, jobbers 
 and booksellers do not have to keep a stock of a spe- 
 cial edition. In practice the plan works well. 
 
 Librarians for years have been annoyed because 
 certain books, such as the Brownie books, have 
 given such poor service no matter how they were 
 bound. In the original boards they went to pieces 
 very quickly and the paper was of such a character 
 that they were hard to rebind. The strong leather 
 bindings bound from the sheets were too strong be- 
 cause the paper wore out long before the binding. 
 In 1912 books of this character, through the initia- 
 tive of Mr. H. R. Huntting in Springfield, Massa- 
 chusetts, were sewed by the Samson-back method, a
 
 H4 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 strong machine sewing; they were then covered with 
 cloth and the paper covers, so attractive to children, 
 pasted on the outside. The cost of the books was 
 much less than that of the leather-back binding and 
 they were much more attractive. The Samson-back 
 method of reinforcement therefore practically solved 
 the problem of binding large thin books with wide 
 margins at the back, precisely the books that had 
 given librarians the most trouble.
 
 CHAPTER VII 
 
 COST 
 
 Binding is a work of repair, not one of expan- 
 sion, and consequently the amount spent for this 
 purpose adds little to the resources of the library,. 
 The modern librarian does not begrudge money for 
 salaries ; heat, light and the general up-keep are 
 items that cannot be reduced materially in most li- 
 braries. But money spent on binding reduces the 
 funds available for new books. Therefore, a study 
 of the many ways in which binding bills can be 
 made smaller is well worth while. 
 
 Two elements, material and labor, enter into the 
 cost of binding, labor of course forming the larger 
 part. Since the cost of labor varies in different parts 
 of the United States, it is impossible to give figures 
 of cost applicable to all places. Furthermore, as the 
 cost of both material and labor is increasing con- 
 stantly any statement made at the present time might 
 be wrong a year from now. 
 
 So far as figures of cost are concerned, it there- 
 fore seems best to discuss maximum and minimum 
 figures. On this basis it is fair to assume that it will 
 not be necessary at any time in the near future to 
 pay more than fifty cents a book for fiction and juve-
 
 "6 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 nile books eight inches or less in height, bound in 
 cowhide, government cloth, or the more expensive 
 imperial morocco cloth. For this amount the libra- 
 rian should get the best binding obtainable. As high 
 a price as this is actually charged by a few binders 
 only, some of whom are justified in so doing because 
 they give full value for the money, or because the 
 cost of their labor is high. 
 
 If less than thirty-five cents is paid for fiction 
 and juvenile books eight inches high, it is probable 
 that the binding is not serviceable and therefore not 
 economical ; but in rare cases bindings costing thirty 
 cents a volume will give excellent service. When 
 low prices are charged the librarian should be sure 
 that, taking the ratio of cost to circulation into con- 
 sideration, he is getting full value. In general, it 
 may be said that he who gets fiction and juvenile 
 books well bound for less than forty cents a volume 
 is to be congratulated. Naturally, this statement 
 does not apply to the large libraries which bind a 
 large number of books every month, and can there- 
 fore obtain better rates than the smaller libraries. 
 
 For books bound in cowhide or cloth, the cost 
 increases at the rate of from fifteen to twenty cents 
 a volume for every two inches in height. 
 
 The price of the smallest volumes bound in 
 morocco is considerably greater than of those bound 
 in other materials, and the increase according to size 
 is also somewhat greater. One dollar is the highest 
 price paid within the knowledge of the writer for 
 an eight-inch morocco book, and sixty cents the
 
 COST "7 
 
 lowest price. The difference in the value of the 
 work about corresponds to the difference in price. 
 
 Periodicals bound in government cloth, or duck, 
 may cost from fifty-five cents to eighty cents a volume 
 ten inches or less in height, increasing fifteen cents 
 to twenty cents a volume for every two inches in 
 height. 
 
 Newspapers well bound should not cost less than 
 $2.00 a volume, nor over $4.00. More variations 
 will be found in the prices for newspapers than in 
 any other kind of binding. 
 
 Most binders are paid a certain amount for books 
 eight inches high or less, the prices differing accord- 
 ing to the material used. The price in a few cases 
 increases with each inch or fraction thereof in 
 height to ten inches ; in most cases the increase is for 
 each two inches or fraction. For example, a book 
 which measures eight and one quarter inches in 
 height is charged for at the ten inch rate. One 
 which measures ten and one quarter inches at the 
 twelve inch rate. Sometimes an extra charge for 
 books which are much thicker than usual is justified. 
 
 The following schedule covers practically all the 
 different sizes and materials which the librarian must 
 take into consideration. The prices given are those 
 actually charged by a good library binder.
 
 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 REBINDING 
 
 ADULT AND JUVENILE AND MISCELLANEOUS BOOKS NOT 
 EXCEEDING 2 INCHES IN THICKNESS 
 
 8 in. 9 in. 10 in. 12 in. 
 
 Half Pigskin or Cowhide 45 55 65 85 
 
 Full Cloth (Library Buckram) 40 50 60 80 
 
 Full Imperial Morocco Cloth 45 55 65 85 
 
 Extra sizes 
 14 in. 16 in. per inch 
 
 Half Pigskin or Cowhide i.io 1.30 20 cents 
 
 Full Cloth (Library Buckram)., i.oo 1.20 15 cents 
 
 Full Imperial Morocco Cloth i.io 1.30 20 cents 
 
 Books over 2 inches thick charged at rate of size above. 
 
 MAGAZINES, PERIODICALS, SHEET AND FOLIO Music NOT 
 EXCEEDING 4 INCHES IN THICKNESS 
 
 8 in. 9 in. 10 in. 12 in. 
 Full Cloth (Lib. Buck.) or Full Duck 45 
 
 Full Imperial Morocco Cloth 50 
 
 Half Cowhide 50 
 
 Half Pigskin (English) 55 
 
 Half Pigskin (American) 50 
 
 Half Morocco 65 
 
 Half Duck (Waterproof sides) 45 
 
 14 in. 
 
 Full Cloth Lib. Buck, or Full Duck i.io 
 
 Full Imperial Morocco Cloth 1.20 
 
 Half Cowhide 1.30 
 
 Half Pigskin (English) 1.35 
 
 Half Pigskin (American) 1.30 
 
 Half Morocco 1.50 
 
 Half Duck (Waterproof sides) ... i.io 
 
 Above prices include all lettering on books. 
 
 Books over 4 inches thick charged at rate of size larger. 
 
 Newspapers not over 30 inches, in half library buckram 
 or half duck $2.25, or in full duck, $2.40. 
 
 Special prices for dictionaries, cyclopedias and other sizes 
 not in above schedules. 
 
 55 
 60 
 65 
 
 65 85 
 70 95 
 85 i.io 
 
 70 
 65 
 80 
 
 55 
 
 oo 1.15 
 85 i.io 
 i.oo 1.25 
 65 85 
 
 1 6 in. 
 
 1-35 
 
 Extra sizes 
 per inch 
 
 15 cents 
 
 1-45 
 1. 60 
 
 20 cents 
 20 cents 
 
 1.65 
 i. 60 
 
 20 cents 
 20 cents 
 
 1.85 
 
 25 cents 
 
 1-35 
 
 15 cents
 
 COST IIQ 
 
 SUGGESTIONS FOR REDUCING COST 
 
 Following is a statement of plans for cutting down 
 the cost of binding, a few of them being obviously 
 makeshifts for the benefit of poor or very small 
 libraries. 
 
 BOOKS BOUND BEFORE PURCHASE 
 
 Under this head will be found (in Chapter 6) a 
 full statement of reasons for buying books bound from 
 the sheets. 
 
 REPRINTS BOUND BEFORE PURCHASE 
 
 The cheap reprints of popular novels which cost 
 less than one-half as much as the original edition, 
 although attractive in appearance, are very poorly 
 bound and if bought in original covers must be re- 
 bound within a short time after they are first placed on 
 the shelves. Some librarians find that it pays to send 
 orders for books which can be obtained in cheap 
 reprints directly to their binders, who buy the books 
 and rebind them in the regular half-leather binding 
 which the library uses for its rebound fiction and 
 juvenile. He bills the books to the library at the 
 cost of the volume plus the cost of binding, the total 
 in any event being considerably less than one dollar. 
 Not over ninety cents should be paid and eighty-five 
 cents is the general price for such books. In this 
 way the library gets a book in a good, strong library 
 binding for less than the cost of the original edition 
 in publisher's cover. Furthermore all labor involved 
 in sending the book to the bindery and receiving it 
 again no inconsiderable item is eliminated.
 
 120 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 SECOND-HAND BOOKS 
 
 Akin to the foregoing plan is the practice which 
 some libraries have of sending lists of replacements 
 to dealers in second-hand books and having all books 
 obtained in this way rebound at once before putting 
 them into circulation. Moreover this arrangement 
 eliminates the time and labor necessary to send a book 
 to the 'bindery. Binderies in large cities can under- 
 take to supply second-hand books, with advantages 
 both to themselves and to the libraries employing 
 them. The library is relieved from the necessity of 
 searching for second-hand volumes, while the binder 
 can well afford to do this service for a stated price 
 per volume which will be reasonable from the library 
 point of view, but which will allow the binder profit 
 on all books which he can find at very cheap prices. 
 When such a plan is adopted the binder should under- 
 stand that the library wants neither the cheap books 
 printed on wretched paper and having very small 
 print, nor the very fine editions with colored illustra- 
 tions. 
 
 REINFORCEMENTS 
 
 A reinforced book is one which has been removed 
 from the original publisher's cover, strengthened in 
 various ways and put back into the same cover. (See 
 chapter on this subject, page 108.) In its best form 
 it means the complete resewing of the book with an 
 overcast stitch. It is advisable to buy such books 
 frequently, since they preserve the attractive publish- 
 er's cover and since they can also be recovered by
 
 COST 121 
 
 the library itself without resewing. Statistics kept 
 by the Wilmington Institute Free Library show that 
 such books when properly recovered give as good 
 relative service as those which have been bound be- 
 fore purchase. The main advantage lies in the 
 elimination of the time necessary to send them to the 
 bindery and the greater length of service which they 
 give at the height of their popularity. 
 
 RECOVERING AT THE LIBRARY 
 
 Many books which come to the binding depart- 
 ment require rebinding in order to put them into the 
 best condition, but the books will be used so little 
 that rebinding would not pay. In the numerous 
 cases in which the sewing is in good condition it will 
 be possible to recover them at the library and letter 
 them by hand. In cases where the sewing is poor 
 it will be possible to resew and recover. Such books 
 are neither so strong nor so attractive as books which 
 have been wholly rebound, but they can be recovered 
 at an expenditure of less than fifteen cents a volume, 
 as against forty to fifty cents a volume for binding, 
 and are in sufficiently good condition to wear a long 
 time, perhaps as long as the library needs them. (For 
 description of the process of recovering see page 185.) 
 
 DISCARDING VALUELESS BOOKS 
 
 In the preceding case it has been taken for granted 
 that the books in question add something to the 
 resources of the library and that they must be kept. 
 Books that have outlived their usefulness because they
 
 122 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 have been superseded by later editions, or by other 
 books more authoritative, in all except the largest 
 libraries should be discarded. (For arguments in 
 favor of this see Chapter 8, p. 131.) 
 
 LEATHER vs. CLOTH 
 
 Notwithstanding that he is repeating himself, the 
 writer wishes to emphasize one point. It may almost 
 be made a general rule, though like other rules, it 
 will not work well at all times. Never bind a seldom 
 used book in leather, or a much used one in cloth. 
 
 CHEAP EDITIONS 
 
 Money may be saved by replacing books which 
 need rebinding with good editions cheaper than the 
 cost of binding. (See (/), page 129.) 
 
 PROPER CARE 
 
 The life of the book in the library may be pro- 
 longed in several ways. 
 
 1. In opening the leaves of uncut books at the 
 top the paper knife should be carried to the back of 
 the book, using a dull knife that is thin, long and 
 tapering. 
 
 2. Many books should be carefully opened before 
 being placed on the shelves. This is done by resting 
 the book on its back and dropping the covers on the 
 table. Taking a few leaves at a time first at the front 
 and then at the back, press them down carefully until 
 the middle of the book is reached. If this be done
 
 COST 123 
 
 there is little chance that the back of the book will 
 be broken if the book is suddenly opened. 
 
 3. Books should not be pressed tightly together 
 on the shelves. 
 
 4. They should not be piled on other books rest- 
 ing on their fore-edge. 
 
 5. They should not be pulled from the shelves 
 by the head bands. 
 
 6. They should be dusted frequently. 
 
 7. They should be kept upright on the shelves 
 instead of half-fallen over. 
 
 8. In every way they should be handled as if they 
 were books, not bricks.
 
 CHAPTER VIII 
 PREPARING FOR THE BINDERY 
 
 To decide properly what books should be rebound 
 and how they should be rebound is not a simple matter 
 nor one which should be left to an inexperienced or 
 uneducated assistant. In addition to a good working 
 knowledge of materials and processes the assistant in 
 charge of this work should have a general knowledge 
 of books paper, editions, prices, literary value, time- 
 liness, etc. and good judgment in deciding whether 
 a book should be bound or whether it should be 
 mended, recased, wrapped in paper, recovered, or 
 thrown away. The binding, therefore, should be in 
 the hands of an assistant who understands the de- 
 mands of this department of library service, and for 
 economy's sake as well as for the sake of efficiency 
 it should not be shifted from one person to another. 
 
 Mr. Dana has shown in his "Notes on bookbinding 
 for libraries" how essential it is that binding assistants 
 should know books. Credit for much of what here 
 appears in support of that viewpoint is due him and 
 is herewith acknowledged. 
 
 In considering the binding of fiction and juvenile 
 books the following are some of the questions which 
 the binding assistant must ask and decide before de- 
 termining whether a book is to go to the shelves in a 
 new dress, or to the junk-man as waste paper :
 
 126 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 (a) Is the book in such poor condition that it 
 cannot be rebound or recased? If so, it must be 
 discarded. While this decision is generally easy to 
 make, it is sometimes made difficult by books which 
 are in too good condition to throw away and in too 
 poor condition to rebind. In such cases the decision 
 must depend on the popularity of the book. If very 
 popular, it may be wise to rebind it, for it must be 
 remembered that good library binders can accomplish 
 wonders with books that are in poor condition. 
 
 Sometimes the question arises whether the book 
 is in poor enough condition to need rebinding. Per- 
 haps it will survive a few more issues just as it stands. 
 If the book is a trifle shaky in its covers, the decision 
 should be to rebind. The binder can do a better job 
 at this time than he can when the book becomes more 
 worn, and the life of the book will be prolonged by 
 prompt binding. If the assistant decides not to 
 rebind it, the book will be issued only a few more 
 times before it will have to be withdrawn from cir- 
 culation and sent to the repair room again. The 
 result is a greater loss of time with no actual gain in 
 wear. 
 
 (b) Is the book much read? If it is an old one 
 that is evidently popular, it is reasonable to suppose 
 that it is the policy of the library to supply the demand 
 for this book, and the book will be rebound as a 
 matter of course. A decision about new books which 
 are popular is harder to make because it is fair to 
 ask: 
 
 (c) Is the demand falling off? It is here that
 
 PREPARING FOR THE BINDERY 127 
 
 the assistant must show good judgment. It may be 
 that the book can be rebound easily with profit, if 
 there is a sufficient demand to keep all the copies in 
 circulation. It may be that the book is waning in 
 popularity and that other copies in the library are 
 ample to supply present demands. If they are, the 
 copy in hand should be canceled, since the cost of 
 binding will then be saved. But the assistant should 
 ascertain the condition of the remaining copies. Let 
 us take the case of a novel which has been withdrawn 
 from circulation because it needs rebinding. The 
 assistant looks at the record of circulation on the 
 book card or pocket and discovers that last year the 
 book was issued four times a month, while now it 
 is issued only twice a month. He finds also that 
 there are four other copies. These four copies should 
 be sufficient to meet present demands, and the book 
 .in hand may be withdrawn. But suppose that further 
 investigation shows that two of the four copies are in 
 very poor condition and cannot be rebound. If he 
 withdraws the one in hand, only two good copies will 
 remain, and perhaps these are not sufficient to supply 
 the demand. On the other hand, it is possible that 
 they are sufficient to supply the demand. In any 
 event, the situation is one which requires a knowledge 
 of the book itself, its popularity with the public, and 
 general good judgment. The question may be 
 summed up in this way : 
 
 1. It is cheaper to rebind a book than it is to 
 discard it and later be obliged to buy a new copy. 
 
 2. It is cheaper to discard a book when it seems
 
 128 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 assured that the book's popularity is over, than to 
 bind it and have it remain for years unused. 
 
 (d) If the book is much used, is it a book that 
 the library wishes to circulate? Every library has 
 certain books on its shelves of which those in authority 
 somewhat disapprove, but which are very popular 
 and not poor enough to be done away with altogether. 
 It is sometimes the policy to supply only partially 
 the demand for such books; sometimes to discard 
 them entirely when worn out. The good binding 
 assistant will remember the titles of these books and 
 use good judgment in dealing with them when they 
 come into his hands. 
 
 (e) If the book is not much read, is it a standard 
 work? For example, in the case of a work of An- 
 thony Trollope the assistant discovers that it was 
 issued only once during the last year and that it is 
 the only copy in the library. If he does not "know 
 books," he will be led to believe that the book has no 
 value and will cancel it. In a large library an action 
 of this sort would be unwise; in a small library the 
 decision would depend upon the particular title. Most 
 libraries keep a book of this particular class in order 
 to supply the occasional demand for it. There are 
 many books not written by men with the reputation 
 of Anthony Trollope which, nevertheless, have intrin- 
 sic worth and have a small circle of admirers. They 
 may not have great merit, but on no account should 
 the library be without them. As examples of books 
 of this kind we may take Mrs. Brush's "Colonel's 
 opera cloak" and Theodore Winthrop's "John Brent."
 
 PREPARING FOR THE BINDERY I2Q 
 
 (/) Can the book be replaced with a good reprint 
 which will wear as long as a new binding and cost 
 less? While there are not many cases in which this 
 can be done, the assistant should watch for them. 
 The most noteworthy reprints which will meet these 
 requirements are the volumes in Everyman's Library. 
 In the original Everyman's edition these were entirely 
 unsuited for library use, but in 1910 they were all put 
 into a strong library binding. In the cloth edition 
 they sell for thirty-five cents a volume and can easily 
 be issued from forty to fifty times before being dis- 
 carded. This makes the cost for each issue as small 
 as can be oBtained by binding higher-priced editions. 
 
 The following case, which actually happened, illus- 
 trates the point, although the books are not fiction, 
 Grote's "History of Greece," in twelve volumes, was 
 in bad condition ; several of the cloth backs were 
 torn and the sewing of all the volumes was loose. It 
 was decided to send the books to be rebound at a cost 
 of $5.40. Before doing so, the list of Everyman's 
 Library was consulted and it was found that the work 
 could be obtained in that form in twelve volumes at 
 a cost of $4.20, a clear saving of $1.20, or over 20 
 per cent. The work was seldom used, yet it was 
 necessary to have the set on the shelves; the Every- 
 man's edition answered every purpose, and will un- 
 doubtedly last as long as the rebound set would have 
 done. Unfortunately, owing to copyright provisions, 
 comparatively few of the books which are constantly 
 wearing out can be obtained in this edition. 
 
 (g) Is it an old edition, with poor paper and
 
 130 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 poor type? A book of this sort should never be re- 
 bound but should be discarded and a new copy pur- 
 chased even if the cost of a new copy be much greater 
 than that of rebinding. 
 
 (h) If the book is the only copy in the library 
 and is read not oftener than once in ten years, should 
 it be kept because it is important historically? Good 
 examples of this class of unused books are the works 
 of Charles Brockden Brown. They are not interest- 
 ing at the present time, but when first published were 
 much read. Every student of American literature 
 should read them, and they should be on the shelves 
 of all except the small libraries. Here again good 
 judgment is called for on the part of the assistant. 
 
 (*) Is the book used so seldom that it can be 
 recased or recovered by the library? The process of 
 recasing (described on page 184) can be used in the 
 case of small-sized books which have covers showing 
 little evidence of wear, and which do not receive hard 
 usage. The process of recovering (described on page 
 185) can be used on leather-bound books which have 
 cracked at the joints. In either case the sewing must 
 be perfectly sound. 
 
 (;') Finally, let us suppose that we have asked 
 all the foregoing questions and are still undecided 
 what to do. There will be very few cases of the kind. 
 Perhaps the best solution is to wrap the book in 
 paper, letter it with author, title and call number, 
 and transfer it from the fiction shelves to the regular 
 literature shelves. It may stay there for years unused 
 and yet be at hand when finally called for.
 
 PREPARING FOR THE BINDERY 131 
 
 With books other than fiction and juvenile many 
 of the same questions must be asked. In addition, 
 however, it is sometimes necessary to ask the follow- 
 ing: 
 
 (a) Are there later editions which are more 
 valuable? This question will arise with frequency 
 especially in the case of scientific, technical and refer- 
 ence books, and careful judgment must be exercised 
 in making decisions. It often happens that a later 
 edition of a technical book has little more value than 
 the one which precedes it; frequently it entirely 
 supersedes the earlier edition. In the one case the 
 book can be rebound with profit, in the other it is 
 best to discard it and buy the latest edition. Some 
 libraries keep all the editions of a book for historical 
 purposes ; but most libraries, especially the smaller 
 ones, will do better to discard older editions when 
 they are superseded by later ones. Sometimes a 
 book has no later edition, but its place has been en- 
 tirely taken by the work of other authors. In such 
 cases it should be remembered that an out-of-date 
 technical book in the hands of an inexperienced per- 
 son frequently causes more harm than good. It may 
 cost more to buy a new book than to rebind an old 
 one; yet this is exactly what should be done in every 
 such case if the funds of the library permit. 
 
 (b) May not the library be better off without 
 either the book or a substitute? In the past libra- 
 rians have hesitated to discard any book which has 
 once been placed on the shelves. They have believed 
 that all printed matter has value and that a book
 
 132 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 which belongs to the library is sacred and must on 
 no account be destroyed. It is difficult to defend 
 such an attitude. If we admit for the time being 
 that the librarian never makes mistakes in acquir- 
 ing books, still it is sure to happen that many 
 books will outlive their usefulness, except as a part 
 of the history or bibliography of the subject. Why 
 should they be kept on the shelves when they are not 
 used and ought not to be used? It cannot, of course, 
 be admitted that the librarian makes no mistakes in 
 acquiring books; every library in the country will 
 show examples of poor selection. Why, after a mis- 
 take has been made, refuse to admit it? If the 
 original purchase (or acceptance of a gift) was a 
 mistake, to keep the book on the shelves simply per- 
 petuates the mistake and adds to the expense of 
 maintenance. It is no crime to discard a book. On 
 the contrary, in many cases, it is the only sensible 
 thing to do. In doubtful cases, however, the book 
 should be kept. 
 
 ARRANGEMENT 
 
 If the final decision is to bind the book the next 
 step is to arrange the book in the way in which it 
 should be bound. The question of collation is one 
 on which there has been a difference of opinion. 
 Some librarians have claimed that it is best to collate 
 books at the library in order to prevent imperfect 
 books being bound, since it is always disappointing 
 to discover, after a book has been bound, that it is 
 incomplete. In the great majority of cases, how-
 
 PREPARING FOR THE BINDERY 133 
 
 ever, collation is a waste of time, since good binders 
 refuse to bind imperfect volumes. In the case of 
 very valuable books, especially those with many 
 plates, and even in the case of less valuable books 
 which have many illustrations not paged-in, it may 
 be best to collate at the library since it is obviously 
 unfair to the binder to expect him to be responsible 
 for anything except the main paging. Fiction or 
 juvenile books may sometimes be bound when one or 
 two pages are missing. Juvenile books, especially, 
 often go to the bindery with missing pages. Many 
 times these missing pages are not especially import- 
 ant and in these cases it seems more economical to 
 bind the book than to buy a new copy. If the number 
 of missing pages is not too great they may be type- 
 written from other copies. Books other than fiction 
 or juvenile should seldom be bound in an imperfect 
 condition. 
 
 Another exception to the rule of sending books 
 uncollated is in the case of popular periodicals, such 
 as Scribner's, Harper's, Century, etc., where the li- 
 brary has only one copy which it binds. Since peri- 
 odicals frequently become torn and mutilated and 
 must be replaced it will save delay in having the vol- 
 umes bound, if the collation is done at the library. 
 
 But while collation is generally unnecessary, ar- 
 rangement in proper order is essential. In dealing 
 with periodicals this is not always an easy task. 
 They should first be examined to see that all the 
 numbers are in hand, and that there is a title-page 
 and an index. It would seem as if there were little 
 
 10
 
 134 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 chance to go astray in doing this, yet the vagaries of 
 periodicals are innumerable and nothing must be 
 taken for granted. If only five monthly numbers 
 are found when there should be six to complete the 
 volume, it is not best to conclude hastily that it is in- 
 complete. Sometimes the cover indicates that two 
 numbers are published in one. If it is not so indi- 
 cated one must look at the paging. If the paging is 
 consecutive, and there is a title-page and index, it is 
 safe to assume that the volume is complete, even if a 
 number is apparently missing. 
 
 The general rule for arranging periodicals is: 
 Place title page at the beginning, followed by table 
 of contents, text, and index at the end. Periodicals 
 in English are generally easy to arrange, though 
 even in this case one must know whether the period- 
 ical in hand is in the habit of publishing supplements 
 which are paged separately, but which are called for 
 by the table of contents. If such supplements are 
 omitted the volume is incomplete. An example of a 
 periodical of this class was the Annals of the Amer- 
 ican Academy of Political and Social Science, before 
 it changed to its method of issuing each number as a 
 separate volume. Many volumes of English period- 
 icals such as All the Year Round, Household Words, 
 etc., have been bound without the Christmas supple- 
 ments, which those periodicals always issued. A few 
 periodicals in English have two or more sets of 
 pagings either in each number, or in some of the 
 numbers and not in others. When the numbers are 
 taken apart and the proper pagings grouped together, 
 the table of contents will generally indicate how these
 
 PREPARING FOR THE BINDERY 135 
 
 should be arranged. But if not, it is usually readily 
 apparent which is the main paging and which the 
 minor paging or pagings. 
 
 Though rarely found in periodicals printed in 
 English, this exasperating condition of affairs fre- 
 quently exists in foreign periodicals. The Germans 
 are especially fond of printing several different parts 
 in the same number. Frequently a long monograph 
 will begin in the first number of a volume and ex- 
 tend through two or more volumes. When com- 
 pleted it may or may not have a special title-page 
 and index of its own. Perhaps the table of contents 
 of the last volume in which part of it has appeared 
 will call for it as a supplement to that volume. Per- 
 haps it does not. In any event the paging must be 
 removed from the first and succeeding volumes until 
 the monograph is finally complete. If it is not called 
 for by any regular title-page or table of contents, it 
 may be bound separately. Sometimes a periodical 
 will appear in two or more parts each month, each 
 part covering some phase of the larger subject indi- 
 cated by the general title of the periodical. These 
 parts will be paged separately and numbered differ- 
 ently but will have the same kind of cover, and care 
 must be used to keep the proper parts together. 
 Peculiarities and irregularities of this sort make peri- 
 odicals veritable puzzles, some of which it may take 
 months to solve. 
 
 In arranging periodicals, front covers having a 
 different color from the text must be kept to facili- 
 tate use. 
 
 Advertisements as a rule should not be bound.
 
 136 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 Since they are a part of the history of the times, it 
 is desirable for a few of the largest libraries to bind 
 the advertising pages of one or two numbers a year 
 in each periodical. Other libraries should throw them 
 away. It is not necessary to remove them entirely 
 before sending the volumes to the bindery; tearing 
 down two or three inches on pages which are to be 
 discarded is sufficient indication to the binder that 
 they are not to be bound. 
 
 Several magazines, such as McClure's and Every- 
 body's, have, for several years, made a practice of 
 leaving articles unfinished in the main paging and 
 continuing them on advertising pages. This is an 
 annoying practice since great care must be taken to 
 see that all text matter is complete, even if it becomes 
 necessary to bind all advertising pages. 
 
 Many periodicals, especially those of a scientific 
 character, contain plates which are not paged-in. If 
 these are scattered through the text they may be 
 allowed to stay there, but if they are grouped to- 
 gether at the end of each number they should be 
 placed together in proper order at the end of the 
 complete volume. 
 
 The vagaries of periodical publishers are shown 
 as much in the way in which they issue (or do not 
 issue) title-pages and indexes as in any other way. 
 The proper way, which is seldom done, is to issue 
 both title-page and index in the last number of each 
 volume. Some publishers issue them in the first 
 number of the next volume; some at various times 
 during the publication of the succeeding volume.
 
 PREPARING FOR THE BINDERY 137 
 
 Some publish a title-page at the beginning of the first 
 number of a volume and an index when the spirit 
 moves. Some publish a title-page but no index or 
 table of contents. Others publish a title-page and 
 table of contents but do not send them unless re- 
 quested to do so. Many publish neither title-page nor 
 index, and perfectly reputable periodicals which have 
 published these essential parts of a periodical for 
 twenty years or more will suddenly cease publishing 
 them. It is evident that title-pages and indexes are 
 nuisances in preparing periodicals for the bindery. 
 
 The assistant in charge should keep a record 
 showing (a) which publishers must be asked to send 
 title-pages and indexes, and this should be done as 
 soon as possible after the volumes are complete; 
 
 (b) in which number of a periodical title-pages and 
 indexes may be looked for if they come regularly; 
 
 (c) which periodicals do not publish title-pages and 
 indexes. 
 
 If lack of funds makes it impossible to bind peri- 
 odicals and they must be wrapped in paper it is 
 highly important that title-pages and indexes be in- 
 cluded, since it may be impossible to obtain them 
 when funds permit binding. 
 
 Changes in the size of periodicals are a cause of 
 annoyance. The annoyance is not great when the 
 change is from a large quarto to an octavo, for the 
 cost of binding an octavo is considerably less than 
 that of a quarto. Unfortunately, the present ten- 
 dency is almost wholly the other way. Many period- 
 icals, for years published in a comfortable octavo
 
 138 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 size have been changed to a much larger size. This 
 in itself is exasperating, but in addition the pub- 
 lishers apparently make no effort to change the size 
 with the beginning of a new volume, so that part of 
 a volume will be of one size and part of another. In 
 such cases the troubles of the binding assistant may 
 be readily imagined. 
 
 While it is highly important to bind only complete 
 volumes of periodicals, it is occasionally permissible 
 to bind volumes with guards for missing numbers 
 which may be inserted later if they are obtained. 
 This method makes it possible to put a volume into 
 permanent form better suited for use than unbound 
 numbers, and prevents further loss of numbers 
 already in hand. It can be done only when the 
 numbers are very thin, particularly in the case of 
 newspapers. 
 
 Quite a number of periodicals have so few pages 
 in each number that a complete volume makes a 
 very thin book. In such cases it is best to bind two 
 volumes in one at the cost of one. 
 
 Among other material which passes through the 
 hands of a binding assistant are the annual reports 
 of various organizations religious, charitable, fra- 
 ternal, governmental, etc. In large libraries these 
 must be bound for permanent preservation. In small 
 libraries the annual reports of all local organizations 
 should be bound if funds permit, others wrapped in 
 paper and lettered on the wrapper. Whether they 
 are to be bound or wrapped in paper, they should be 
 grouped by regular periods, preferably five or ten
 
 PREPARING FOR THE BINDERY 139 
 
 reports in a volume, according to size, following the 
 decades or half decades. 
 
 INSTRUCTIONS TO THE BINDER 
 
 Having decided that the volume must be bound 
 and having arranged it in its proper order, the next 
 step is to indicate to the binder how it is to be bound 
 and lettered. Various methods have been used to 
 indicate style and lettering. Some libraries have an 
 elaborate binding slip, giving on one side the differ- 
 ent materials, colors, etc., and having the other di- 
 vided into panels for lettering. A slip is made for 
 each book and the binder follows it carefully. Some 
 libraries arrange an arbitrary system with the binder 
 making one letter or figure indicate much that other- 
 wise would have to be written in full. For example, 
 "C" under such an arrangement might mean "Bind 
 in one-half red cowhide with green cloth sides." 
 Some librarians give a general blanket order to bind 
 all fiction in one way and all juvenile books in 
 another. 
 
 For most books in English, except periodicals, 
 lettering need not be indicated on a binding slip. All 
 that is necessary is to underscore lightly on the title 
 page the first letter of words which must be used. 
 The call number may be put on a binding slip enclosed 
 in the book, or in the case of fiction and juvenile books, 
 it may be pencilled lightly on the title page, thus 
 doing away altogether with the binding slip. If there 
 is a chance for misunderstanding on the part of the
 
 HO LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 finisher, or if an author's real name must be used 
 instead of a pseudonym which appears on the title 
 page, a binding slip must be filled out giving exact 
 lettering. 
 
 While exact lettering on a binding slip is not 
 essential for ordinary books, it is necessary for 
 periodicals, each set of which should be bound and 
 lettered uniformly. This may be assured by making 
 out a binding slip giving in full the title, dates cov- 
 ered, volume number and call number, if one is used. 
 The slip goes to the bindery with the book, and when 
 the volume is returned is filed so that when the next 
 volume is to be bound the slip can be consulted and 
 a new one written with the necessary changes in 
 volume number and dates. The chief value of the 
 slip is to show exactly how the previous volume has 
 been bound, so that the following volumes can be 
 made uniform if possible. 
 
 A carbon copy of binding slips for periodicals 
 should be made, to be kept at the library for charging 
 purposes. 
 
 When binding volumes which are a part of a set, 
 other than a periodical, a slip must be made to be kept 
 on file so that when another volume of the set comes 
 to hand it will not be necessary to visit the shelves 
 to see wliether other volumes have been bound and 
 how they have been bound. 
 
 In finishing periodicals the position of lettering 
 and the size of type used may be kept uniform if the 
 binder takes what is called a "rub" or "rub-off" of 
 the book after it is lettered and keeps it on file at
 
 PREPARING FOR THE BINDERY 141 
 
 the bindery. This can easily be made by laying a 
 sheet of thin, but tough, paper over the back and 
 rubbing it with shoemaker's heel-ball which will show 
 white lettering on a black background. When the 
 next volume comes to the bindery the "rub-off" shows 
 exact height of boards, exact position of lettering and 
 size of type. 
 
 A few libraries have had a dummy back made for 
 each periodical showing color and kind of material 
 in addition to other details. But the cost of a dummy 
 is not slight and a new one must be made whenever 
 any change in title or size occurs. Large college or 
 reference libraries may need dummy backs for their 
 numerous sets of foreign periodicals having various 
 marks, such as umlauts, etc., over or under letters. 
 When a library operates its own bindery it is possible 
 to send the last bound volume as a sample. While 
 this adds much to the routine, its main advantage is 
 that it eliminates the possibility of mistakes due to 
 defective dummy or indistinct "rub-off." 
 
 LETTERING 
 
 It is necessary that binders understand exactly 
 how books are to be lettered, what kind of type to 
 use and the position on the back of the book which 
 each item of information must have. There are dif- 
 ferences of opinion as to the best ways of lettering, 
 but it is essential that every librarian have uniformity 
 in his own library, even if he disagrees with his fellow 
 workers. In all lettering a bold, clear type should be
 
 142 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 used, and all figures should be in Arabic, since it is 
 plainer than Roman. 
 
 In most leather bindings the back is divided into 
 five or six panels, making it possible to obtain uni- 
 formity by setting aside each panel for a definite 
 purpose. If desired, another narrow panel may be 
 made in which to stamp a mark of ownership. Panel- 
 ing is a useful device in the case of books which are 
 eight inches or more in height, but in the case of 
 juvenile books and fiction it may be omitted entirely. 
 As most of these books require simply author, title 
 and call number, if one be used, the device of panel- 
 ing adds to the labor in binding and serves no useful 
 purpose in the library. It should be used on most 
 other books bound in leather and on all periodicals 
 bound in cloth or duck. 
 
 Which shall go at the top of the book, author or 
 title? In favor of the title it can be claimed that all 
 publishers letter the title first with the author second ; 
 and since in non-fiction the books in publishers' covers 
 on the shelves will outnumber the rebound books, it is 
 advisable to put the title first in order to have uni- 
 formity. On the other hand, it can be claimed that 
 the arrangement under the class is by author, that 
 most library assistants look for the author rather than 
 the title, and that it is therefore advisable to put the 
 most important item of information at the top in the 
 position of greatest prominence. In the opinion of 
 the writer this advantage outweighs any other. 
 
 It may be assumed, therefore, that the best ar- 
 rangement is author, title, volume number if neces-
 
 PREPARING FOR THE BINDERY 143 
 
 sary, and call number. In the case of fiction, juvenile 
 books and all other books from which it seems desir- 
 able to omit panels, these items will be put on with 
 sufficient space between to make them independent of 
 each other. The bottom of the call number should 
 be i 1 /^ or 1 l / 2 inches from the tail of the book on all 
 books in the library, except oversized books, which 
 should have the call number at the top (Fig. 16). If 
 panels are used, the author's name should be near the 
 bottom of the first panel, the title in the second, 
 volume number in the fourth and call number in the 
 fifth (Fig. 15). 
 
 If two books are bound together, letter, author 
 and title of the second book in the third panel (Fig. 
 
 17). 
 
 When a work is in more than one volume with 
 separate titles for each volume, place the author's 
 name in the first panel, general title in the second, 
 volume in the third and the title of the particular 
 volume in the fourth (Fig. 18). 
 
 If six panels are used, each item is dropped one 
 panel. 
 
 In most cases the author's last name is sufficient, 
 but occasionally it may be necessary to use initials to 
 distinguish between authors having the same name. 
 Use both surnames of joint authors (Fig. 19). For 
 pseudonyms use the form adopted by the cataloging 
 department. For example, if the catalog entry is 
 under Clemens instead of Twain, letter Clemens on 
 the book. Both real name and pseudonym may be 
 put on the back, but it does not seem necessary. In
 
 144 
 
 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 Beecher 
 
 
 9I4-5 
 James 
 
 
 Patton 
 
 
 Bancroft 
 
 Sermons 
 
 
 Italian 
 Hours 
 
 
 Home 
 And School 
 Sewing 
 
 Works 
 
 
 
 
 Rorer 
 Hot Weather 
 Dishes 
 
 30 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 
 Oregon 
 
 2 
 
 252 
 
 
 
 641 
 R694 
 
 979-5 
 
 B22 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Fig. 15 
 
 Fig. 16 
 
 Fig. 17 
 
 Fig. 1 8 
 
 Kipling 
 Balestier 
 
 Plato 
 
 National 
 Conference on 
 City Planning 
 
 
 Naulahka 
 
 Dialogues 
 
 Proceedings 
 
 Nineteenth 
 Century 
 
 
 Jowett 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 I 
 
 Chicago 
 
 Jan. -June 
 1894 
 35 
 
 K575 
 
 888 
 P6g 
 
 352 
 N23 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Fig. 19 
 
 Fig. 20 
 
 Fig. 21 
 
 Fig. 22
 
 PREPARING FOR THE BINDERY 
 
 145 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Nature 
 
 National 
 Municipal 
 Review 
 
 Littel's 
 Living 
 Age 
 
 Independent 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Nov. 1895 
 Apr. 1896 
 
 S3 
 
 1913 
 
 2 
 
 July- Sep. 
 1888 
 
 178 
 
 Apr. -June 
 1903 
 55 
 Part 2 
 
 
 
 Series 5 
 63 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Fig. 23 
 
 Fig. 24 
 
 Fig. 25 
 
 Fig. 26 
 
 Punch 
 
 1882 
 82-83 
 
 Fig. 27 
 
 O 
 3. 
 
 . 
 
 3 
 
 O 
 00 
 
 Fig. 28 
 
 
 
 
 Harper's 
 Magazine 
 
 
 Monist 
 
 
 
 
 Index 
 1-40 
 
 1908 
 18 
 
 
 Index 
 1-17 
 
 
 
 Fig. 29 
 
 Fig. 30
 
 146 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 the case of the classics add the name of translator 
 or editor in the panel under the title (Fig. 20). 
 
 When the names of foreign cities or countries must 
 be placed in the author panel, use the English form. 
 Names of government departments, bureaus, etc., 
 should be inverted if necessary to bring the distinctive 
 word first. For example, use Health bureau, not 
 Bureau of health. 
 
 In lettering titles it is seldom desirable to omit 
 the first part of the title in order to use words which 
 are more distinctive, in other words, to use a binder's 
 title. If it is necessary it should be done with 
 care and discrimination. Ordinarily, give first words, 
 omitting articles. Very long titles must be con- 
 densed, sometimes at the expense of clearness. 
 
 Proceedings of organizations which meet in dif- 
 ferent cities should have the name of the place of 
 the meeting lettered in the third panel (Fig. 21 ).. 
 
 On periodicals, the author panel is left vacant and 
 the title of the periodical given in full in the second 
 panel. Here it is never permissible to omit first words, 
 except articles. Letter "American review of re- 
 views," not "Review of reviews." In case of foreign 
 periodicals it may be necessary to place a sub-title in 
 the third panel when a periodical is issued in two or 
 more parts and each part bound separately with a 
 distinct title page. With this exception, leave the 
 third panel vacant and letter date and volume number 
 in the fourth panel. Place first the months covered 
 by the volume, followed by the year (Figs. 22 and 23.)
 
 PREPARING FOR THE BINDERY 147 
 
 Use the first three letters of each month, except June 
 and July, which should be given in full. On foreign 
 periodicals use the English abbreviations for months. 
 If the volume covers the calendar year the months 
 may be omitted (Fig. 24). In the same panel place 
 the volume number beneath the year. 
 
 If the periodical has more than one series give 
 dates and total volume number, placing underneath 
 the series number and volume of series (Fig 25). 
 
 If the unbound volume of a periodical is too large 
 to be bound in one book, bind it in two volumes and 
 letter the exact months in each part, placing "Part i" 
 and "Part 2" underneath the volume number (Fig. 
 26). 
 
 If two volumes are bound in one give the inclusive 
 volume numbers (Fig. 27). 
 
 In the case of periodicals having more than one 
 series and which are indexed in Poole's index or 
 the Readers' guide, the volume number given first 
 should correspond with the one given in the indexes,, 
 
 Thin volumes must be lettered lengthwise in the 
 same order as outlined above. Always letter from 
 head to tail. This facilitates reading on the shelves, 
 since shelves are naturally read from left to right. In 
 lettering lengthwise place the book number below the 
 class number, if there is room, if not, after the class 
 number with a hyphen between (Fig. 28). 
 
 Oversized books which must be shelved on their 
 sides should also be lettered from head to tail. 
 
 If the book is an index complete in itself letter
 
 148 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 the word "Index" in the fourth panel, followed by 
 the inclusive volume numbers covered by the index 
 (Fig. 29). 
 
 If a periodical index covering several volumes is 
 included at the end of one of the volumes, place the 
 word Index and the inclusive volume numbers under- 
 neath the dates and regular volume number (Fig. 30). 
 
 Other questions are sure to arise, but they can 
 be solved satisfactorily if it be remembered that the 
 essentials are definiteness and clearness.
 
 CHAPTER IX 
 BINDING RECORDS AND ROUTINE 
 
 Binding records must be as simple as possible, but 
 they should 
 
 1. Instruct the binder. 
 
 2. Show what books are in the bindery and when 
 they were sent. 
 
 3. Show how previous volumes of a set have 
 been bound. 
 
 4. Act as a check on books when returned. 
 
 5. Show the cost of binding. 
 
 Some librarians keep a record of all books bound, 
 called a "binding book." To the writer the need of 
 a permanent register of books bound is not apparent. 
 It is much easier to keep in other ways a record of 
 books actually in the bindery and after the books 
 have been bound and returned to the library the value 
 of having the fact recorded in any other place than on 
 the accession book is negligible. In the case of 
 popular books easily replaced we may even question 
 the necessity of recording in the accession book the 
 fact that a book has been bound. Any other per- 
 manent record seems useless. 
 
 i. When books are sent to the bindery the binder 
 must be told : 
 
 a. In what material each book is to be bound. 
 
 b. How each book is to be lettered. 
 
 11
 
 150 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 The best way to indicate lettering, etc., has been 
 shown in the chapter "Preparing for the bindery." 
 The designation of material and color can frequently 
 be done by giving a blanket order if the books are of 
 the same character. For example, if all the books 
 are fiction it is perfectly feasible to send a written 
 order, stating that they are all to be bound in half 
 brown cowhide with red cloth sides, French joints, etc. 
 If the shipment is a miscellaneous one of periodicals, 
 reference books, fiction and juvenile books it may 
 be necessary to state on the binding slips how each 
 book is to be bound. 
 
 2. For public libraries the question of keeping a 
 record of books that are in the bindery is a simple 
 one. The use^ of book cards for charging purposes 
 is practically universal. All that is necessary is to 
 remove the book card from the book, stamp the name 
 or first initial of the binder's name and the date after 
 the last charging date (Z25Api4), and file the cards 
 just as they are filed at the loan desk. If a book 
 cannot be found on the shelves or in circulation, it 
 takes but a few seconds to discover whether or not 
 it is in the bindery. When the book is returned the 
 card is replaced in the book. This is the easiest way 
 of keeping this record and shows at once how many 
 times a book circulated in the publisher's covers be- 
 fore it needed to be bound. 
 
 For books which have no book cards, such as 
 reference books and periodicals, it will be necessary 
 to write a slip which can be filed as a record with 
 the book cards. If a binding slip must be sent to the 
 bindery, by using carbon paper both slips can be made
 
 RECORDS AND ROUTINE 151 
 
 at the same time. The binder should be notified if 
 books have not been returned; if unable to find them 
 he must pay for them. 
 
 It is possible that some may think this method of 
 keeping records unduly lax ; that without a permanent 
 record in book form many errors will creep in and 
 that books will be lost. The answer to such a criti- 
 cism is that in the Wilmington Institute Free Library 
 it has worked for a period of ten years. During that 
 time more than 25,000 volumes have been bound by 
 five different binders, and the writer does not recall 
 that a single volume has gone astray or that there 
 have been any errors which would have been avoided 
 if a record had been kept which required a careful 
 invoicing of each volume sent to the bindery. When 
 the books are shipped a statement is sent to the 
 binder that so many volumes are in the shipment and 
 it is his business to keep the books in this shipment 
 together and return all at the same time. It is his 
 responsibility, not that of the librarian. 
 
 3. Records showing how previous volumes of a 
 set are bound should be kept as outlined under "Pre- 
 paring for the bindery," page 140. The binding 
 slip for the last volume of the periodical will show 
 how it is bound. As an alternative to the carbon slip 
 for periodicals it may be possible to keep a record of 
 volumes in the bindery on the periodical checklist, if 
 that be kept on sheets. A similar record should be 
 kept for all books with volume numbers. For ex- 
 ample, if volume 10 of Smith's works comes to the 
 binding assistant a binding slip should be made out 
 which records the material and color in which the
 
 152 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 book is to be bound, together with exact lettering 
 used. When returned from the bindery this slip 
 should be filed and referred to when another volume 
 of the same work needs to be bound. Unless this is 
 done it will be necessary to go to the shelves to see 
 whether other volumes have been bound. If only 
 one volume has been bound and that is in the hands 
 of a reader it will be necessary to wait until it is 
 returned, all of which means loss of time. No book 
 with a volume number should be sent to the bindery 
 without consulting the "file of binding slips. If there 
 is no record that a previous volume has been bound 
 it may be advisable for the assistant to go to the 
 shelves to see if there are other volumes of the same 
 set which need binding. It is little more work to send 
 five volumes than to send one. 
 
 4. From what has been said it can readily be 
 seen what sort of a check is placed upon the binder. 
 Books sent to him are charged to him as if delivered 
 to a borrower. If he does not return them he must 
 pay for them. Let the method be elaborate or simple, 
 this is all that it amounts to. It behooves the 
 librarian, therefore, to make his charging as simple as 
 is compatible with safety. 
 
 5. Records of cost may be kept in various ways, 
 but the essential facts which it is best to record are: 
 
 o. Number of volumes rebound; 
 
 b. Number newly bound; 
 
 c. Number resewed or recased; 
 
 d. Number repaired at the library ; 
 
 e. Total cost. 
 
 If desired, the cost of each of the foregoing items
 
 RECORDS AND ROUTINE 153 
 
 may be kept. A large library will also need to keep 
 a record of the binding for each branch, and possibly 
 for each department in the main library. 
 
 In most cases it is not necessary for the binder 
 to send a bill itemized by author and title. 
 
 It will be sufficient if he bill the books in some 
 such way as this : 
 
 52 vols. Cowhide 8 in. @ .45 $23.40 
 
 16 vols. Buckram 10 in. @ .65 10.40 
 
 6 vols. Imperial morocco cloth 8 in. @ .50 3.00 
 
 2 vols. Morocco 8 in. @ .70 1.40 
 
 $38.20 
 
 Books may more easily be checked with such a bill 
 than with an itemized one. The information may 
 then be drawn off on a sheet, allowing a column for 
 each material and size, monthly and yearly statistics 
 being easily compiled from these sheets. If it is the 
 policy of the library to send an itemized invoice of 
 books to be bound the binder should return the invoice 
 with prices for each volume added. 
 
 In large libraries, such as the large college and 
 reference libraries and public libraries with many 
 branches, more elaborate binding records than those 
 just outlined are necessary. College libraries, which 
 do not as a rule have book cards, will find it necessary 
 to make out a slip of one kind or another for charging 
 purposes. In large library systems books should be 
 sent directly from the branch to the binder and re- 
 turned to the branch. A record should be sent to the 
 head of the binding department at the main library, 
 showing the number of volumes sent with the date, 
 also the date when the books were returned to the
 
 154 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 branch. Each branch should, of course, keep records 
 in much the same way as a single small library, but 
 the needs of statistics require further records at the 
 main library. 
 
 It is probable that each large library will have to 
 work out forms suitable for its own needs, but the 
 following are suggested as feasible. 
 
 Volumes 
 */2 Mor. 
 Lib. Buck. 
 Cloth 
 y 2 Duck 
 
 % Pig 
 Light Brown 
 Dark Brown 
 Black 
 Dark Blue 
 Dark Green 
 Red 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Binding slip. Size 6x4 in. 
 Material and color are indicated on the left by 
 underlining. Author, title, volume number, etc., are 
 written in proper panels.
 
 RECORDS AND ROUTINE 155 
 
 BLANKTON PUBLIC LIBRARY 
 Branch Date 
 
 Following books are ready for binding: 
 
 vols. to be bound in J4 morocco. 
 
 vols. to be bound in library buckram. 
 
 vols. to be bound in J4 duck. 
 
 vols. as samples. 
 
 vols. to be repaired. 
 
 vols. for corrections. 
 
 Branch Librarian. 
 
 Size 5x3 in. 
 
 This slip is filled out by the branch librarian and 
 sent to supervisor of binding, who decides who shall 
 bind the books and sends the order to the binder. 
 
 BLANKTON PUBLIC LIBRARY 
 
 Order No. 1002. tgi 
 
 Messrs 
 
 Please send to Branch 
 
 for the following books : 
 
 vols. to be rebound. 
 
 vols. samples. 
 
 vols. to be repaired. 
 
 vols. for corrections. 
 
 Bind according to specifications, following in- 
 structions for style on binder's slip in each book. 
 
 Please return books with bill to the Branch. 
 
 Supervisor. 
 Size 5x3 in.
 
 156 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 When books are returned to the branch they are 
 checked up with the bill. If there are no discrepancies 
 the bill is sent to the binding supervisor. 
 
 Order No. 1002. Sent 191 
 
 from . . Branch 
 
 to 
 
 vols. to be rebound, 
 vols. samples, 
 vols. to be repaired, 
 vols. for corrections. 
 
 Returned 191 Amt. $ 
 
 Blankton Public Library. 
 
 Size 5x3 in. 
 
 This slip, made out at the central library upon 
 advice from branch librarian that books have been 
 shipped, is filed numerically. When bill is received, 
 the information is drawn off on a monthly sheet. A 
 similar slip can be used to keep records for each 
 branch separately. 
 
 The weekly or monthly statistics sheets ought to 
 give in vertical columns the number of volumes and 
 cost of each kind of binding and repair . work used 
 by the library. They will include one-half cowhide, 
 one-half morocco, library buckram, one-half duck, 
 reinforcing, recasing, lettering, etc. The first column 
 at the left will have the names of different depart-
 
 RECORDS AND ROUTINE 157 
 
 ments and branches. The last column on the right 
 will give the total expenditure for each department 
 and branch, and the footings of columns will give the 
 cost of each kind of work. If necessary this sheet 
 can also indicate number of volumes rebound and the 
 number of volumes newly bound. 
 
 BINDING ROUTINE 
 
 In preparing books for the bindery and keeping 
 binding records a regular routine should be adopted 
 which should be followed as closely as possible in 
 order to avoid errors. Each library should adopt a 
 routine suited to its needs, modifying when neces- 
 sary the following suggestions. 
 
 BINDING ROUTINE FOR SMALL LIBRARY 
 
 i. Examine book, noticing condition, complete- 
 ness, title pages, indexes, etc., and decide how book 
 is to be bound. 
 
 2. Underline on title page the first letter of 
 words which must be lettered on back. Pencil call 
 number on reverse of title page. 
 
 3. If volume is a periodical or a volume in a set 
 make out binding slip giving volume number and 
 dates. 
 
 4. File book cards at loan desk. 
 
 5. Send books to bindery. 
 
 6. When books are returned check bill with 
 books to see that no mistake has been made in 
 charges.
 
 158 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 7. Replace book cards in books. 
 
 8. File slips for periodicals. 
 
 BINDING ROUTINE FOR MEDIUM-SIZED LIBRARY 
 
 1. Examine books for binding noticing condi- 
 tion, completeness, plates, title pages, indexes, num- 
 ber and condition of copies, editions and various 
 other points noted under "Preparing for the Bindery." 
 
 2. If the book is a periodical find title page and 
 index. A special record ought to show when these 
 are due and which periodicals do not publish them. 
 Arrange exactly as the book is to be bound. 
 
 3. If the book is a periodical consult file showing 
 how previous volumes have been bound and make 
 out a binding slip with carbon copy, making such 
 changes as are required by changes in title, date and 
 volume number. The binding slip should be laid in 
 the front of the book. 
 
 4. If the book is one of a set see if other vol- 
 umes have been bound. 
 
 5. For books, not periodicals, indicate lettering 
 by underlining on the title page the first letter of 
 each word that is to go on the back. 
 
 6. Indicate color, material, volume number, call 
 number, etc., on a binding slip which should be laid 
 in front of the book. If the shipment is all fiction 
 and no call number is used it will not be necessary 
 to make out any slip of instruction. A blanket order 
 may be made saying that all books are to be bound 
 in a certain way. 
 
 7. When ready to send to the bindery, remove
 
 RECORDS AND ROUTINE 159 
 
 book card or carbon copy of binding slip. Leave 
 slips containing information for the binder in the 
 book. 
 
 8. Pack books and send to the binder, notifying 
 him of the date of shipment and the number of vol- 
 umes sent as follows : 
 
 96 vols. to be rebound. 
 
 25 vols. of periodicals. 
 
 3 vols. to be recased. 
 
 4 vols. of corrections. 
 2 vols. of samples. 
 
 130 
 
 (It sometimes happens that a volume of a set is 
 going to a binder who did not bind the previous vol- 
 umes. In such a case the second binder has no 
 "rubbing" and a sample volume or a "rubbing" must 
 be sent.) 
 
 9. Stamp carbon slips, and book cards after the 
 last charging date, with the name or initial of the 
 binder and the date sent. 
 
 10. File book cards and carbon slips alphabeti- 
 cally by author, or first word of title in the case of 
 periodicals. 
 
 11. When books are returned from the bindery 
 see that bill is correct. 
 
 12. See that books are lettered correctly, return- 
 ing such as are incorrect. 
 
 13. Remove book cards from the file and place 
 in the books. 
 
 14. Letter book pockets or book plates with call
 
 l6o LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 number and accession number, if this is the custom 
 of the library. 
 
 15. Send periodicals and other books which have 
 not been properly recorded to the order or accession 
 department to follow regular routine for new books. 
 Books that have been rebound may go directly to the 
 shelves. 
 
 1 6. File binding slips for periodicals and destroy 
 slips for previous volumes. 
 
 17. If it is the custom of the library to enter 
 cost of binding in the accession book it will be neces- 
 sary to put the accession number and cost on the 
 binding slip. These slips may then be arranged 
 numerically by accession number and the cost entered 
 in the accession book. 
 
 ROUTINE FOR LARGE COLLEGE AND REFERENCE 
 LIBRARIES 
 
 The routine just given is as simple as can be 
 made without endangering the safety of books. It is 
 not sufficiently accurate for the large libraries, espe- 
 cially the college libraries which bind a large number 
 of periodicals belonging to many departments, each 
 department being obliged to pay for its own binding. 
 This requires complex records in the binding depart- 
 ment. In order to eliminate as many mistakes as 
 possible it will be necessary to have a binding card 
 for each periodical and for sets. (See Fig. 31) 
 
 This card has a line for the title, a place for the 
 description of the binding, and is ruled on both sides. 
 On the right-hand side it is ruled in three columns
 
 RECORDS AND ROUTINE 
 
 161 
 
 Harper's Magazine 
 
 Color 
 
 Style 
 
 Volumes 
 
 Pri ce 
 
 Sent 
 
 Ret'd 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 FIGURE 31. Size 5x3 in. 
 
 price, sent, returned. The lettering may be indicated 
 by vertical lines in the title, one for change of line in 
 the same panel, two for change of panel. 
 
 When no volume of a set is at the bindery the 
 card is left in a permanent file of bindery cards. 
 When a volume is sent to the bindery the card is 
 transferred to a temporary file, showing what peri- 
 odicals are at the bindery. 
 
 1. Examine volumes for completeness; see that 
 all numbers of periodicals are included and arranged 
 in proper order. In the case of books examine quickly 
 for missing signatures. With both books and peri- 
 odicals leave page collation to the binder. 
 
 2. Make charging slip and send to the loan desk. 
 Books for departments should be charged in tjhe 
 departments and not at the loan desk. 
 
 3. If a periodical, find title-page and index (if 
 one is not published there should be a note to that
 
 162 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 effect on the binding card) ; and if separate, lay inside 
 the volume. 
 
 4. If volume is part of a set examine binding 
 records to see if other volumes have been bound. If 
 no record is found in binding files look in catalog and 
 order records to see if other volumes are already in 
 the library, or have been recently bought and are not 
 yet cataloged. If it is desirable to match exactly old 
 sets bound elsewhere, make a "rub-off" for the binder 
 and indicate the material and color. If the volume is 
 one of a new set make decision in regard to style of 
 binding and order a sample back. 
 
 5. If a periodical, get old card from "binding 
 returned" file. In the case of new periodicals and 
 books a card must be made, and the binder instructed 
 to make a sample back for future use. Enter volume 
 on card (one volume a line, unless several volumes 
 are to be bound together) . 
 
 6. Fill out binding slip (see page 154), indicating 
 full lettering, proper spacing, style and material. 
 Also make note on bottom of slip for such directions 
 as "make sample back," "include all front covers," 
 "no title page or index published," etc. 
 
 7. In the case of separate books it will be neces- 
 sary to make out a card similar to the periodical 
 binding card to be used in sending invoice of ship- 
 ment to the binder. 
 
 8. Place binding slip in front of volume; tie up 
 periodicals and lay aside with the volumes waiting 
 to be shipped. 
 
 9. When shipment is ready to be sent, arrange 
 cards :
 
 RECORDS AND ROUTINE 163 
 
 a. By departments which are responsible for the 
 cost of binding; 
 
 b. Alphabetically by author or title under depart- 
 ments. 
 
 10. Make typewritten list in triplicate (or more if 
 necessary) of volumes for each department; one copy 
 for filing, one for the binder and one to go to the 
 order department with an estimate of the cost to serve 
 as a charge against the proper department. If the 
 departments against which charges must be made are 
 many it may be simpler to list the books as they come, 
 even if several departments are on one page, and to 
 draw off from this the charges for the order depart- 
 ment. Where departments are numerous and the 
 record of each department is kept on a separate sheet 
 there are a great number of sheets to handle, causing 
 annoyance both in the binding department and in the 
 bindery. Two lists may be sent to the binder so that 
 he may add prices to one when the books are returned. 
 This saves his time and also that of the binding assist- 
 ant. 
 
 11. Stamp date on the binding card in the column 
 marked "sent." 
 
 12. Stamp name of binder on binding card if the 
 work is divided among different binders. 
 
 If all the work of the library goes to one binder 
 this will not be necessary. 
 
 13. Ship the books. 
 
 14. File one copy of the list made out as noted 
 in No. 10, send one copy to the binder, and add the 
 estimated cost to the third list which is sent to the 
 order department.
 
 164 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 15. File cards in "binding sent" file. 
 
 16. When books are returned itemized bills art 
 sent by the binder made out to each department. 
 
 17. Check books with the bills, arranging books 
 in order of bills. 
 
 1 8. Take cards out of "binding sent" file in order 
 of bills so that bills, books and cards are in the same 
 order. 
 
 19. Compare lettering with slip to see if correct, 
 lay aside such as are incorrect to be returned to the 
 binder. Destroy slips. 
 
 20. See if charge is correct and enter on binding 
 card in column marked "price." If there is a sample 
 back, enter the cost and letters "S. B." above the 
 line of the volume for which it is made. 
 
 21. Stamp date of bill on card in column marked 
 "returned." 
 
 22. Stamp date of bill and cost in book on first 
 recto after title page: "27 June 1914 Binding 75." 
 
 23. Send books to the cataloging department for 
 cataloging, shelf-listing, etc. 
 
 24. Draw off on statistics sheet number of vol- 
 umes and cost. 
 
 25. Send bills to the order department. 
 
 26. File cards for periodicals and all books with 
 volume numbers in permanent file. Destroy cards for 
 single books.
 
 CHAPTER X 
 REPAIRING, RECASING, RECOVERING, ETC. 
 
 Practically all repairs to a book short of rebinding 
 should be made in the library, since the work requires 
 little space and no machinery, and the books may 
 speedily be replaced on the shelves for general use. 
 Large or medium sized libraries can well afford to 
 hire one or more girls as menders, while the small 
 library must utilize the spare time of regular assist- 
 ants. 
 
 When books are sent to the binding department 
 they shouM be sorted into the following groups : 
 
 Books to be (a) rebound, (&) recased, (c) recov- 
 ered, (d) mended, (e) discarded; to have (f) new 
 sides, (,) new labels, (Jt) new book cards or pockets. 
 
 When menders are employed all except those in 
 the first group may be cared for in the library. 
 
 In sorting the books the question of whether to 
 rebind or repair at the library must be decided for 
 all books, except those in the discarded class and those 
 which need new records (tags, pockets, book cards, 
 etc.). The decision is not always an easy one to 
 make. The kind of library in question, whether 
 public, college, subscription, etc., will influence the 
 decision, as well as the actual condition of the book. 
 
 12
 
 l66 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 A few general rules about mending may help in 
 making decisions. 
 
 1. If the book has never been rebound and in all 
 probability must go to the bindery in a few months' 
 time, send to the bindery at once. Mending not only 
 adds nothing to the life of this book, but may easily 
 shorten it. 
 
 2. Mend books which have been rebound once 
 but which it would not pay to rebind again. Judicious 
 mending of such books may keep them in service for 
 a long time, but there comes a day when the use 
 gained does not pay for the time put upon them. 
 
 3. Mend books which have nearly outlived their 
 usefulness or which are to be withdrawn absolutely 
 when worn out. The question need be decided only 
 when the book is fairly clean, for if very soiled it 
 should be withdrawn at once. 
 
 4. Mend books which must be on the library 
 shelves, but which are seldom used. 
 
 5. Mend books printed on heavily loaded papers 
 which will not pay to rebind. There are, unfortu- 
 nately, many of them. 
 
 6. Mending cannot be done if the sewing is com- 
 pletely broken, though it is sometimes possible to 
 insert signatures which are loose. 
 
 7. Books with broken corners must be rebound. 
 
 8. Recase books which have sewing intact and 
 covers in good condition, if they will be used com- 
 paratively seldom. 
 
 9. Recbver books which have worn covers but 
 firm sewing.
 
 REPAIRING, RECASING, RECOVERING, ETC. 167 
 
 MENDING MATERIALS 
 
 ADHESIVES 
 
 Paste. Home-made pastes are cheapest. While 
 there are various recipes for paste, either of the 
 following will give satisfaction: 
 
 (i) 
 
 Wheat flour, 8 oz. 
 
 Powdered alum, % oz. 
 
 Glycerine, i l /2 oz. 
 
 Oil wintergreen, I dram. 
 
 Water, \y 2 pts. 
 
 Dissolve the alum in water and mix gradually 
 with the flour into a smooth, thin paste; cook in a 
 double boiler until smooth and clear; take from the 
 fire and add the glycerine and oil of wintergreen. 
 This quantity will make about one quart. If after 
 standing a day a watery fluid collects, stir it into 
 the paste. Keep this paste covered. 
 
 (2) 
 
 l /4 pound of flour (i cup), 
 i teaspoonful of alum, dissolved. 
 i generous fourth teaspoonful of oil of 
 
 clove. 
 
 4 cups of boiling water. 
 
 Mix the flour well with a little cold water, beating 
 until perfectly smooth. Add the alum dissolved in 
 a little cold water. Pour on two cups of the boiling 
 Water, strain through a wire 'sieve. Add the re- 
 mainder of the boiling water and cook, stirring
 
 168 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 constantly until partially clear. Add the oil of clove 
 and put into a clean, covered earthen jar. The paste 
 thickens as it cools. Take out small quantities for 
 use. The materials for this paste cost less than 2 
 cents for a hundred books. 
 
 To all pastes it is best to add a spoonful of carbolic 
 acid or formaldehyde to prevent spoiling. A small 
 quantity of corrosive sublimate will make paste 
 unattractive to bugs. 
 
 Although home-made pastes are cheapest, they 
 are a bother to make and the saving of expense over 
 commercial pastes is not worth while except in the 
 very small library. Besides paste in bulk which can 
 be obtained from the local binder there are many 
 kinds of commercial paste. Some may be bought 
 in powders ; others, designed primarily for mount- 
 ing photographs, in glass jars; still others in cans 
 ready to use. The powders are cheap, keep inde- 
 finitely, but when needed must be mixed with water, 
 and as a rule are not very satisfactory. Higgins' 
 and other photo-mounting pastes are expensive and 
 dry too quickly, but keep indefinitely. In the long 
 run the most satisfactory pastes are those in tin cans 
 with tight lids; these are ready to use, do not dry 
 up and the preservative which they contain keeps 
 them indefinitely. The Arabol Manufacturing Com- 
 pany, loo William Street, New York, makes several 
 varieties. Their "Sphinx" paste, which gives ex- 
 cellent satisfaction, can be bought in six one-gallon 
 can lots at 75 cents a gallon, f. o. b., nd in larger 
 quantities at slightly reduced rates. Great care should
 
 REPAIRING, RECASING, RECOVERING, ETC. 169 
 
 be used to avoid having the paste so thin that it 
 makes the paper stretch. 
 
 Although paste is a necessity in every library, 
 there is a tendency to use too much of it, and to 
 use it when it is not necessary. Ordinarily it will 
 injure the book less than other adhesives, but it 
 should be used sparingly on books that must be 
 rebound. When applied to the backs of loose signa- 
 tures they become brittle; then when the book goes 
 to the bindery a much larger amount must be cut 
 from the back than would otherwise be the case. 
 
 If paste is to be applied to part of the paper 
 only, the easiest way is to lay the paper on a board, 
 place another piece of paper over it, leaving exposed 
 the surface to which paste is to be applied. It can 
 be spread more evenly with the finger, faster with a 
 soft, long-handled brush. The larger libraries will 
 find a pasting-machine a great time-saver. Book 
 labels, book pockets, new end papers to freshen soiled 
 books anything which needs to have the entire sur- 
 face covered is pasted on the machine in one-tenth 
 the time required by hand. 
 
 Glue. For ordinary mending, glue should never 
 be used. (See Materials, p. 82.) Flexible glue, how- 
 ever, is a necessity for recasing and recovering books. 
 It keeps indefinitely, can be used easily by those 
 who acquire the knack of using it, and it sticks ever- 
 lastingly. 
 
 Mucilage. Mucilage has no real place in a 
 library. If paste is not the suitable material to use, 
 substitute flexible glue, never mucilage.
 
 170 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 CLOTH 
 
 Cheesecloth. This well-known cloth is used when 
 pressing down paper or book labels after they have 
 been pasted and applied, and for quickly cleaning 
 the hands of superfluous paste or glue. It should 
 be cut in pieces of convenient size and not used many 
 times before being discarded. 
 
 Jaconet. A thin, strong muslin will be needed for 
 guarding sections and occasionally for forming joints. 
 Jaconet is the best and may be obtained from a few 
 library binders. 
 
 Canton flannel. A medium grade of this cloth is 
 used for back-lining. 
 
 Book cloth. If recovering or re-siding is done 
 the library must have a supply of book cloths in the 
 shades preferred. For re-siding, any cloth in grade i 
 (see page 75) is sufficiently good. For recovering 
 cloths in the grade which meets the requirements of 
 the Bureau of Standards are none too good. If much 
 recovering is done it is best to buy the cloth by the 
 piece. 
 
 Crepeline. This very thin cotton cloth, also called 
 mousseline, through which print is easily read, is 
 sometimes pasted over the entire surface of pages 
 which receive very hard usage, and which would 
 otherwise be literally thumbed to pieces long before 
 the rest of the book. 
 
 Specially prepared cloth. The Gaylord Bros., of 
 Syracuse, and the Multum in Parvo Binder Co., of 
 Philadelphia, manufacture hinges made of cloth. 
 While these are often useful they cannot be used under
 
 REPAIRING, RECASING, RECOVERING, ETC. 171 
 
 any and all conditions, as one might be led to believe 
 from the claims of the manufacturers. 
 
 PAPERS 
 
 Onion skin. Onion skin is a very thin, tough 
 paper, used for mending torn pages, illustrations, etc., 
 where print must show through. While it may be 
 obtained gummed on one side, very little is gained, 
 for it is nearly as easy to paste the ungummed onion 
 skin as to moisten the gummed. For tears which do 
 not run into the text a thin, strong bond paper will 
 be satisfactory. 
 
 Kraft or manila paper. A 30x40 6o-pound kraft 
 paper makes good end papers in recasing and recov- 
 ering. A 7o-pound manila paper may be used instead 
 of kraft, if desired. 
 
 Red rope manila. This is a very strong, tough 
 fibred cardboard which may sometimes be used as 
 covers for books that it will scarcely pay to put 
 into stouter covers. It may be obtained in several 
 weights, the lighter weights being sufficiently strong 
 for library use. 
 
 THREAD 
 
 Even if no resewing is done, thread is necessary 
 for making various repairs. The best are Hayes' 
 linen thread No. 25, and Barbour's No. 40. 
 
 AMMONIA 
 
 This is necessary for breaking down surfaces of 
 highly glazed cloths so that labels will stick.
 
 172 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 SHELLAC 
 
 After labels or the backs of books have been let- 
 tered in white or black ink they should have a covering 
 of shellac. A supply of the best white shellac may 
 be obtained from the local paint dealer. 
 
 Occasional use is found for various other materials, 
 such as powdered pumice stone, sponge rubber, India 
 rubber erasers and art gum. 
 
 TOOLS 
 
 FOLDERS 
 
 Several binder's bone folders, costing fifteen cents 
 each, should be kept in the binding department. 
 
 KNIVES 
 
 A long knife, broad at the point, thin-bladed but 
 dull, is needed for cutting paper after it is folded and 
 for various other uses. A sharp, pointed knife is 
 needed for removing books from the covers, or old 
 labels from the back. 
 
 SCISSORS 
 
 Long, thin-bladed, best quality. 
 
 NEEDLES 
 
 Regular book-sewing needles. 
 
 HAMMER 
 
 A broad-faced hammer may be required for beat- 
 ing down the backs of sections, or the entire book 
 when it is difficult to replace it in its old cover.
 
 REPAIRING, RECASING, RECOVERING, ETC. 173 
 
 PRESS 
 
 Books wet with paste or glue must be pressed. An 
 old-fashioned letter-press which screws down by hand 
 will answer all purposes in a small library. As they 
 are now out-of-date, second-hand ones can be pur- 
 chased for a small sum. There are one or two inex- 
 pensive small presses which are not so heavy as the 
 letter-press, but which hold a larger number of books 
 and are fairly satisfactory. The most satisfactory press 
 is a stationary one which holds a number of books 
 and which will exert great pressure. On account of 
 lack of space and the cost it is inadvisable to use this 
 in a mending room, and makeshifts are generally 
 necessary. 
 
 PRESS-BOARD 
 
 A few press-boards with projections which will fit 
 into the joints of books may be necessary. They may 
 be obtained from any dealer in binders' supplies. 
 
 SEWING BENCH 
 
 If any resewing is done a sewing bench is a neces- 
 sity. Ordinarily books needing resewing should be 
 sent to the bindery. 
 
 GLUE-POT 
 
 A double-boiler glue-pot is a necessity if recov- 
 ering or recasing is to be done. It should be kept 
 clean. 
 
 BRUSHES 
 
 A long-handled, small-sized brush with soft
 
 1/4 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 bristles will be used for pasting, while glue will re- 
 quire a large, round brush such as is commonly used 
 in binderies. 
 
 PASTING MACHINE 
 
 A good pasting machine will cost about ten dollars, 
 but it is a great time saver. There are several on 
 the market. In the Wilmington Library the "Uni- 
 versal" is used and gives satisfaction in all cases when 
 a machine can be used. 
 
 CUTTING-BOARD 
 
 A small-sized cutting-board, such as is used by 
 photographers, is useful in the mending room as well 
 as in other parts of the library. 
 
 CLEANING 
 
 A part of the duty of the mending department is 
 to remove such dirt or stains as can readily be 
 removed without injury to the books. 
 PAGES 
 
 Various materials may be used for cleaning books 
 which show soiled pages here and there, but which 
 are in the main fairly clean. A red rubber or a sponge 
 rubber is much better than an India rubber eraser. 
 The latter should never be used unless the paper is 
 excellent in quality. Bread crumbs rolled in a ball or 
 powdered pumice stone put on with a dry cloth will 
 often give good results. If the book is much soiled, 
 or has mud stains, it may be advisable to use ivory 
 soap and water with a few drops of ammonia, applied 
 with a piece of cheesecloth well wrung out.
 
 REPAIRING, RECASING, RECOVERING, ETC. 175 
 
 If the paper is of good quality it may be washed 
 with Javelle water, a preparation used in French 
 laundries. This may be made by the following recipe : 
 
 To one pound of chloride of lime add four and a 
 half pints of water, and put in a jar with tight cover. 
 In a separate vessel, dissolve 20 oz. of ordinary wash- 
 ing soda in four and a half pints of boiling water, 
 and immediately pour it into the first mixture. When 
 cold add enough water to make eleven pints in all. 
 Strain through muslin, settle, and pour off the clear 
 solution. After using it care must be taken, to rinse 
 the paper thoroughly with water, as it tends to rot 
 paper. 
 
 In the cleaning of pages care should be taken not 
 to erase any marks made by the cataloging or 
 accession departments. Rubbing must be done slowly 
 and the pages held flat to prevent tearing. Rub from 
 the inside outward. All traces of pumice stone, rub- 
 ber, etc., should be carefully removed. If water and 
 soap have been used, it may be necessary to put a 
 pressing tin under the leaf, placing blotting paper on 
 each side. 
 
 Fox marks may be removed by immersing the 
 leaves in a weak solution of chlorine water and then 
 transferring to a hot bath of very weak hydrochloric 
 acid. 
 
 To remove creases from leaves accidentally folded, 
 place the leaves between moistened blotters enclosed 
 between dry blotters and press. This can be repeated 
 until the crease is entirely removed. Sometimes 
 creases may be ironed out with a hot iron.
 
 176 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 Ink stains can be removed by any one of the 
 standard eradicate rs (oxalic acid followed by chloride 
 of lime). Stains from pad ink used for dating stamps 
 can be removed with benzine. 
 
 The edges of leaves on very soiled books may be 
 sandpapered. In this case the book should be held 
 very firm, if possible in a vise. 
 
 To PREVENT MILDEW OR MOLD 
 
 Occasionally books are accidentally soaked with 
 water. In many a fire more damage is done by water 
 than by fire. In such cases it may be a waste of 
 time and money to reclaim ordinary books which can 
 easily be replaced. It is a different matter when it 
 comes to rare books and especially to manuscripts 
 which cannot be replaced. Mr. J. I. Wyer, Jr., direc- 
 tor of the New York State Library, in his annual 
 report for 1911 describes as follows the method used 
 in that library after the disastrous fire of that year. 
 
 The first step was to remove all covers. Each volume was 
 then taken apart leaf by leaf, and each sheet was laid between 
 print paper for drying. After twenty-four hours every leaf 
 was again handled and placed between heavy blotting paper ; 
 after twenty-four hours here, each leaf was again removed 
 to a second blotting paper. At all of these stages pressure 
 was applied to facilitate the drying and keep the documents 
 from wrinkling. . . . When each leaf had thus passed through 
 these three drying processes, those belonging to the same 
 volume were collected and carefully tied up in boxes or sepa- 
 rate packages to wait until all the manuscripts were thus 
 treated. . . . When all were dried, the manuscripts were ar-^ 
 ranged in volumes. . . . The rarest pieces will in time be
 
 REPAIRING, RECASING, RECOVERING, ETC. 177 
 
 mended, nearly all will be covered with crepeline, all will be 
 mounted on fresh paper and carefully bound into new 
 volumes. 
 
 COVERS 
 
 Covers may be cleaned by the same materials as 
 those used on pages, but the best method is to wash 
 them with soap and water. For this reason the use of 
 a washable cloth for covers, such as keratol, durabline, 
 or fabrikoid, is an advantage. Miss Margaret Brown, 
 in her pamphlet on mending, Library handbook No. 
 6, advises the use of a wash as follows : "Two parts 
 good vinegar and one part water. Apply with a 
 clean cloth and rub hard until dirt is removed, then 
 place upright to dry. This should not be used on 
 leather." 
 
 _Grease spots may be removed from both leather 
 and cloth by covering with a blotter and ironing with 
 a hot iron. The same method will partially remove 
 paint or varnish. 
 
 For a great variety of cleansing receipts see 
 Coutts and Stephen's "Manual of library bookbind- 
 ing," Chapter X. 
 
 Covers that have warped must be dampened and 
 put under pressure. 
 
 Shellacing of covers has been advocated by some 
 librarians, but it is doubtful if it pays. It may be 
 used in the interests of cleanliness on books bound in 
 light colored cloth and on books in towns where the 
 atmosphere is very smoky. It is a process which 
 takes some time since two coats of shellac must be 
 applied, and it does not increase the wear of the cloth
 
 178 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 to any great extent. As a regular part of preparing 
 the book for use it takes more time and material than 
 it is worth. 
 
 Sometimes a book becomes wonderfully rejuven- 
 ated simply by having its cover and edges cleaned and 
 a new pocket pasted in the back. 
 
 MENDING 
 
 It is very desirable that mending should not be 
 done by inexperienced assistants, for an uninstructed 
 beginner may do as much harm as good. 
 
 TORN PAGES . 
 
 Torn pages may be mended in any one of the 
 following ways : 
 
 1. If the tear does not affect the printing, cut a 
 strip of thin, tough bond paper one-half inch wide, a 
 little longer than the tear to be covered, put through 
 pasting-machine and cover the tear, trimming the 
 overhang even with the page. 
 
 2. If the page is torn into the text, and the book 
 is not valuable commercially, use ungummed onion 
 skin about one-half inch wide and apply as above. If 
 onion skin is not available a very thin, tough bond 
 paper will do very well. Use a thin coating of paste, 
 first putting a piece of white paper under the page 
 to absorb extra paste. 
 
 3. If torn in the text and it is desirable to make 
 as good a job as possible, use the following method : 
 
 Rub a very little paste on the torn edges, and place 
 them together. Then take a rather large piece of 
 ordinary tissue paper and rub it gently along the tear
 
 REPAIRING, RECASING, RECOVERING, ETC. 179 
 
 so that the tissue paper will adhere to the torn edges. 
 Put under the press ; when dry the superfluous tissue 
 paper should be torn off, taking care to pull always 
 toward the tear and from both sides at the same 
 time. The delicate fibre of the tissue paper acts as 
 an adhesive in such a way that it is almost impossible 
 to discern how the mending was done. 
 
 4. If the margin of the leaf of a valuable book is 
 torn in several places, take two sheets of paper the 
 size of the leaf, cut out from the middle of each a 
 piece a little larger than the letter-press of the book ; 
 trim the torn leaf so that it remains somewhat larger 
 than the space cut out of the blank leaves ; place it 
 between these two leaves and paste down, thus form- 
 ing new margins. 
 
 Books that have torn leaves mended may be put 
 into the press, but it is not strictly necessary. When 
 very much of this mending is done pressing is impos- 
 sible unless a standing press is at hand. 
 
 A few books such as Granger's Index and some 
 of the Poole's Index volumes should have the first 
 few pages entirely reinforced with cloth. The best 
 cloth for this purpose is crepeline, through which the 
 text can be easily read. When applying it put a thin 
 layer of paste on the leaf and then put on the cloth. 
 The book should then be pressed, first protecting 
 adjoining pages with paper. 
 
 LOOSE LEAVES 
 
 Loose leaves may be inserted in several ways: 
 i. Lay a piece of white paper over the leaf, 
 
 allowing one-eighth of an inch of back margin of
 
 l8o LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 the leaf to project. Paste this exposed surface and 
 attach it to the adjoining leaf in the book, pressing 
 down firmly. This can be done only when adjoining 
 leaves are firm. 
 
 2. Sometimes the leaf when inserted will extend 
 beyond the fore edge of the book. Trimming of 
 either back margin or fore edge is inadvisable. It is 
 possible to turn over about one-eighth of an inch of 
 back margin, using some kind of straight edge for 
 this purpose. Apply paste to turned over part and 
 press the fold well down into the book. This will 
 give more freedom to the leaf than if one-eighth of 
 an inch has been cut off and another eighth of an inch 
 pasted. 
 
 3. Fold strips of thin bond paper cut with the 
 grain, three-fourths of an inch in width, through the 
 center. Paste the outside. Attach the loose leaf to 
 one side and attach the other side to the adjoining 
 leaf in the book. It will be necessary to work quickly 
 because the paper strips when wet will cause a 
 wrinkling of the leaf. This method can be used only 
 if adjoining leaf is firm, but can never be employed 
 with over-casting. 
 
 4. If necessary to use as little paste as possible, 
 apply paste to a piece of common soft string by 
 drawing it over a board covered with paste. Then 
 draw the string through the book at the back. Tho 
 leaf may then be inserted. 
 
 LOOSE SIGNATURES 
 
 Ordinarily when one signature become: 
 others speedily follow, and the book must
 
 REPAIRING, RECASING, RECOVERING, ETC. l8l 
 
 to the bindery unless it is withdrawn absolutely. 
 Sometimes, however, one section will become loose 
 when the rest of the book is firm and solid, some- 
 times also the use a book will receive does not 
 warrant binding. In such cases, if the book has 
 a loose back, open the section in the middle and place 
 it in its proper place in the book. Thread a darning- 
 needle with Hayes' No. 25 thread (or Barbour No. 
 40), pass the needle through the hole at top of the 
 section (the kettlestitch hole) in such a way as to 
 bring it out at the top of the book between the book 
 and the loose back. Draw thread through, allowing a 
 few inches to remain inside the section. Drop needle 
 through the loose back, insert it from the back 
 through the kettlestitch hole at tail of the book. The 
 thread can then be tied to the thread projecting at 
 the upper kettlestitch hole. This is a makeshift, but 
 may answer if the book is not to receive hard usage. 
 If the back of the signature is badly worn, mend it 
 by guarding with jaconet on the outside, or by pasting 
 a strip of bond paper down through the center of the 
 fold. 
 
 Tight Backs 
 
 For tight backs cut a guard of firm, thin cloth, such 
 as cambric or jaconet, about three-fourths of an inch 
 wide and as long as the book. Sew the section to 
 the middle of the guard, and paste the guard to the 
 book, one-half to each of the adjoining leaves. Press 
 this guard well back into the book. This can be 
 done only when the adjoining pages are securely held. 
 
 13
 
 182 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 LOOSE JOINTS 
 
 It frequently happens that a book in the original 
 publisher's cover becomes loose at the joint, because 
 the super used as back-lining cannot stand the strain 
 put upon it. Ordinarily, a book defective in this 
 manner should be bound at once; but if it is deemed 
 best to attempt mending it, a strip of jaconet should 
 be cut i l /4 inches wide and the length of the book. 
 Paste one-half of this to the cover and the other to 
 the adjoining fly-leaf, thus transferring the strain 
 from the super to the fly-leaf. This method can also 
 be used to mend a break in the middle of a book, but 
 should never be used if the book must eventually be 
 rebound. 
 
 Another method of mending a loose joint is to 
 remove the book entirely from the cover, sew on new 
 end papers guarded with muslin, and cover the back 
 of the book with canton flannel which extends three- 
 fourths of an inch on each side. When dry, paste 
 the entire back of book and sides and put the book 
 back into the cover, pasting down the new end paper. 
 This is, in effect, recasing. (See page 184.) 
 
 Sometimes books which are loose at the joints and 
 have loose signatures may be mended by applying 
 paste with a long-handled paste brush to the backs of 
 the signatures. This must never be done if it is 
 possible that the book will need to be rebound later. 
 
 FLY-LEAVES 
 
 To add new fly-leaves, cut paper suitable for this 
 purpose the same length as the old fly-leaves and
 
 REPAIRING, RECASING, RECOVERING, ETC. 183 
 
 one-half inch wider. Fold over this one-half inch, 
 paste it on the outside and attach it to the old fly- 
 leaf. If necessary, this may be used as a new end 
 paper and pasted to the cover over the old end 
 paper. If used as an end paper, the book should be 
 pressed promptly to prevent it from warping. 
 
 REPAIR OF MAPS 
 
 All old or mutilated maps or charts must be flat- 
 tened out by placing the maps between large mill- 
 boards with heavy weights over them, before they 
 can be inserted in books. Repairs may be made with 
 onion skin paper or any other thin, tough paper, the 
 same as is done with torn leaves in books. If the 
 map is very old and valuable, it may be advisable to 
 use paper which resembles in a way the texture and 
 color of the map itself. 
 
 It is advisable to mount all maps on some kind 
 of cloth. It is best to have this done by a regular 
 binder, but it may be done in the library if there is 
 sufficient room. 
 
 If the map is to go on rollers, a piece of cotton 
 cloth is tacked to a large table, the top of the cloth 
 pasted, and the map placed on top, back down, all 
 wrinkles having been removed. Millboards or straw- 
 boards are then placed on the map and weights placed 
 on top until it is dry. This may take some time, after 
 which it may be tacked to the rollers. 
 
 If it is a folding map or chart, it may be neces- 
 sary to cut the map into sections before mounting. 
 When mounted there will be one-eighth of an inch
 
 184 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 space between sections, so that the map itself will not 
 be defaced through constant folding. The mounting 
 of such maps is a difficult task and should be done 
 only by an expert. 
 
 RECASING BOOKS 
 
 1. Remove book from the cover; cut out old 
 super from the back of the cover; thoroughly clean 
 the back of the book of super and glue without 
 injuring the backs of the signatures. Lift the lining- 
 paper from the back and front boards of the cover 
 and remove the old super. Scrape with a knife the 
 glue which does not come off with the super. If the 
 back of the book seems to be much thicker than the 
 fore edge, pound down with a backing-hammer. 
 
 2. Cut strips of muslin (or canton flannel) a 
 little shorter than the height of the book, wide enough 
 to cover the back and to extend over the boards i*4 
 inches on each side. 
 
 3. Cut enough flexible glue to fill a double-boiler 
 glue pot half full when dissolved. When the water 
 comes to a boil the glue, which must be used hot to 
 get good results, will generally be ready to use. If it 
 is still too thick, add a little hot water to thin it. 
 
 4. Turn back the lining paper on front and back 
 covers, spread the glue on the inside of the back 
 of the cover and on the boards where the lining has 
 been turned back. 
 
 5. Put the strip of muslin in the place just glued ; 
 then rub down the lining paper over the muslin. 
 
 6. Even up tHe book by tapping it on the table
 
 REPAIRING, RECASING, RECOVERING, ETC. 185 
 
 so that no leaves will project at the top, bottom or 
 front. 
 
 7. Holding the book firmly in the hand, glue 
 the back. 
 
 8. Place the back on the muslin lining previously 
 glued to the back of the cover, care being taken to 
 see that the book is not put in upside down. 
 
 9. Fold over the cover and, taking the entire 
 book firmly in the left hand, with the right hand push 
 the book firmly back into the cover. This will prevent 
 it from becoming concave. 
 
 10. Crease the joints with a bone folder and rub 
 down the back. 
 
 11. When the book is dry, open it and, if neces- 
 sary, paste new papers over the inside covers. This 
 is necessary, because it is frequently impossible to 
 turn back the lining and remove the old super without 
 making an unsightly piece of work. 
 
 RECOVERING 
 
 Rules for recovering can be used only when books 
 do not need to be resewed. 
 
 1. Remove cover from the main part of the book. 
 
 2. Remove with a dull knife the cloth from the 
 outside and inside of the cover until the two boards 
 are clean, being careful not to cut into the board itself. 
 It is not worth while to remove old paper sides or 
 end papers. 
 
 3. Remove superfluous glue, super, etc., from the 
 back. If the book has been overcast, and small strips 
 of leather have been placed over the back, paste the
 
 l86 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 ends of these strips of leather to the end papers. 
 Such a book will also have end papers guarded which 
 will remain as an integral part of the book. 
 
 4. If the book has not been overcast, it will be 
 necessary to add end papers. This can be done by 
 using two sheets which when folded once will be the 
 size of the leaves of the book. One of these should 
 be a ob-pound and the other an 8o-pound manila 
 paper, both guarded entirely around the fold with 
 jaconet. Whipstitch the ob-pound fly-leaves to the 
 first and last sections of the book, then whipstitch the 
 8o-pound, being careful to pass the needle back 
 through the first section. Paste one of the fly-leaves 
 and one of the end papers together. 
 
 If the book has been oversewed, cut the end papers 
 of 8o-pound manila or 6o-pound kraft paper the size 
 of the book and paste on the entire surface of the 
 fly leaves which are integral parts of the book. It 
 will not be necessary to guard these new end papers. 
 
 5. Trim the new fly leaves and end papers the 
 exact size of the book. 
 
 6. Mark the boards and book with corresponding 
 numbers so as to identify them. 
 
 7. Place boards on the book to within one-eighth 
 of an inch of the back and mark the distance from 
 the back. 
 
 8. Measure exactly the distance across the back 
 between marks just made on the end papers. 
 
 9. Select the proper cloth with which to cover 
 the book. Place the boards on the cloth, allowing the 
 width necessary for the back as measured in No. 8.
 
 REPAIRING, RECASING, RECOVERING, ETC. 187 
 
 10. Mark around boards on cloth. 
 
 11. Cut cloth, allowing approximately an inch and 
 a quarter all around outside edge of the boards. 
 
 12. Glue the entire surface of the cloth. 
 
 13. Place boards on markings previously made, 
 pressing down firmly on the glued cloth. 
 
 14. Put stiff paper, previously cut to the proper 
 size, on the glued cloth between the boards, to prevent 
 the glue from sticking to the back of the book. This 
 should not be done if the book must have a tight back. 
 
 15. Turn in the corners as follows: Take the 
 exact corner of the cloth and turn it straight in over 
 the corner of the board. Next turn in the end and 
 then the side. Rub down well with a bone folder. 
 
 16. With bone folder, round the corners, and 
 crease the joints at the back. 
 
 17. Put the case so formed into a press for a few 
 minutes. 
 
 1 8. Cut a strip of thin, tough muslin or canton 
 flannel one-half inch shorter than the height of the 
 book and wide enough to extend an inch on each side 
 of the book. 
 
 19. Glue the back of the book and put on the 
 muslin or canton flannel. 
 
 20. Glue the entire surface of the completed case. 
 
 21. With the fore edge in the right hand, lay 
 book in its proper place on the right-hand cover, 
 draw up the left-hand cover and lay it on top. Open 
 the book, rub down the end papers well with bone 
 folder, and rub down the back; also crease the joints. 
 
 22. Put book in press over night.
 
 l88 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 23. Letter by hand either with black or white 
 ink as the case demands. 
 
 RE-SIDING 
 
 Many books which have been rebound with leather 
 backs come to the binding department with the cloth 
 sides badly frayed at the corners or edges. If the sew- 
 ing is good and the book is clean, it is worth while 
 to put on new sides. 
 
 1. Remove cloth sides and smooth off the inside 
 of the board with a dull knife. 
 
 2. Cut two pieces of cloth a little larger than the 
 sides. 
 
 3. Glue the inner surface of the cloth and place 
 on the book, turning in the corners as described in 
 15 on page 187. 
 
 4. Put book in the press. 
 
 5. After book .is dry, paste a single end paper 
 over the inside of each cover. 
 
 REINFORCING 
 
 In Chapter 6 will be found a discussion of the 
 advisability of purchasing books bound from the 
 sheets or in reinforced publisher's covers. While it 
 is advisable on the whole to have reinforcing done by 
 regular library binders, the work can be done in large 
 libraries that have proper equipment and labor. The 
 essential principles of reinforcing are the same in all 
 libraries that practice it, though they may differ as to 
 minor details. The following method has proved 
 satisfactory.
 
 REPAIRING, RECASING, RECOVERING, ETC. 189 
 
 1. Remove the book from its cover, which is laid 
 aside for future use. If the call number is to be 
 gilded it will be easier to do it before the cover is 
 removed than after it is replaced. 
 
 2. Make end papers and fly-leaves of 6o-pound 
 kraft paper or 8o-pound manila, guarded with jaconet 
 on one side of the sheet. End papers should be 
 guarded on the inside of the fold. 
 
 3. Oversew the fly-leaves to the first and last 
 sections of the book, being careful that stitches are 
 not over one-eighth of an inch deep. 
 
 4. Sew the end papers to the fly-leaves which 
 have just been oversewed, and paste fly-leaves and 
 end papers together. 
 
 5. Apply a thin coating of flexible glue to the 
 back of the book and put over it a piece of thin canton 
 flannel cut as long as the book and wide enough to 
 extend an inch on each side. This should be well 
 rubbed down. 
 
 6. Paste the canton flannel which projects on the 
 side to the end papers. 
 
 7. Glue one side of the book and place it on the 
 proper side of the cover. Glue the side remaining 
 uppermost and draw the cover up over it. 
 
 8. Rub both sides and back until sure that the 
 glue is well forced into them. 
 
 9. If desired, the book may be given a coat of 
 white shellac and one of varnish, after which it should 
 be wiped with a paraffine cloth.
 
 IQQ LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 MAGAZINE OR PAMPHLET COVERING 
 
 1. Cut red rope manila cardboard the exact size 
 oi the two covers plus the width of the back. 
 
 2. Remove the cover of magazine or pamphlet, if 
 possible keeping it in one piece. 
 
 3. Fit the red rope cover over the magazine, 
 creasing carefully at the joints with a folder so that 
 it will lie flat across the back as well as over the sides. 
 
 4. Glue the back of the magazine with flexible 
 glue and press it firmly into the improvised cover. 
 Rub down the back with a folder. 
 
 5. Thread a needle with stout linen thread and, 
 using it double, at the middle of the book put the 
 needle through from the inside to the outside. Leave 
 about two inches of thread projecting on the inside. 
 
 6. Put the needle through from the outside about 
 an inch from the head of the book. The needle must 
 come through in the same section where the thread is 
 projecting. 
 
 7. Carry the thread through to about the same 
 distance from the tail of the book and again put the 
 needle through from the inside to the outside. 
 
 8. Return the needle at the same place where 
 the first stitch was taken and tie to the thread left 
 projecting in such a way as to hold fast the long 
 thread through the center. 
 
 9. Paste the paper cover previously removed on 
 to the new cover. 
 
 This method can be used for all pamphlets one-
 
 REPAIRING, RECASING, RECOVERING, ETC. IQI 
 
 half inch or more thick; even for those two inches 
 thick, provided that the use they will receive is slight. 
 In the case of the thicker unbound books, it is neces- 
 sary to sew them in two or three places. 
 
 LABELING 
 
 Few libraries can afford to have all call numbers 
 gilded. Therefore it is necessary either to letter 
 directly on the book, or to put call numbers in ink 
 on a white label which has first been placed on the 
 book. Much objection exists to these gummed labels, 
 because it is claimed that they come off very easily and 
 the work soon has to be done over again. Undoubt- 
 edly this is true if the labels are not properly put on; 
 but if care be taken, there is no reason why the white 
 gummed labels should not last until it is necessary to 
 rebind a book, when of course the call number will 
 be gilded. 
 
 Two points must be remembered in applying labels. 
 
 i. They must be put on at an even distance from 
 the bottom of the book. Perhaps nothing else will 
 give a library such an unsightly appearance as uneven 
 labels some at the top, some in the middle and some 
 at the bottom. The exact distance from the bottom 
 of the book is not one of great importance, but the 
 bottom of the label should not be less than i% inches 
 from the bottom of the book, nor more than two 
 inches. Whatever distance is adopted, it will be neces- 
 sary to have a piece of cardboard which may be used 
 as a measure when applying the label.
 
 J 92 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 2. Labels must be fastened so securely that they 
 will not come off. This seems sufficiently obvious, bin 
 as a matter of fact many assistants who do this work 
 do not spend sufficient time to do it right. 
 
 The following directions should be followed: 
 
 a. If the book is new, it will be necessary to break 
 down the glazed surface of the cloth or leather 
 where the label is to be placed. To do this, use 
 ammonia diluted somewhat with water. Use a 
 brush about the width of the label and draw across 
 the back of the book at the proper place. After 
 having done ten or a dozen books, it is best to wipe 
 off the ammonia with a piece of cheesecloth which 
 brings with it the glaze. 
 
 b. Labels are not put on until books are dry. 
 Use labels made of extra heavy paper, so that they 
 will not turn dark when shellac is applied later. They 
 may be moistened on a wet sponge or on some one 
 of the numerous moisteners, or better still, they may 
 be dipped quickly in hot water with a pair of tweezers. 
 In using some labels it is not inadvisable to cover the 
 gummed surface with a thin coating of paste. As 
 soon as the label is pasted on the book straight and 
 in proper alignment, it should be pressed firmly down 
 with a piece of cheesecloth. This part of the opera- 
 tion should not be hurried and considerable pressure 
 should be used until the label has firmly adhered. 
 
 c. When dry, letter with India ink and cover 
 label with a very thin coating of white shellac. Later, 
 when the first coating is thoroughly dry, cover with
 
 REPAIRING, RECASING, RECOVERING, ETC. 193 
 
 a thicker coating of shellac. This should be done 
 quickly and neatly. If the line of shellac is uneven 
 the book has an unsightly appearance. 
 
 d. If books are thin, it is best to put labels on 
 lengthwise. If very thin, put labels on front covers, 
 near the back. If labels project over the back, trim 
 with scissors. 
 
 If books have been used or have already had 
 labels, the process is the same, except that no ammonia 
 need be used. 
 
 Old labels which have been shellaced are hard to 
 remove. The best way is to apply ammonia and water 
 to the label, allowing it to soak in. When thoroughly 
 moistened, remove with a dull knife. Removing dry 
 labels by scraping with a knife injures the back of the 
 book. 
 
 LETTERING 
 BY HAND 
 
 It is sometimes feasible to letter with ink on the 
 back of a book instead of putting on a label which 
 holds the lettering. If the surface be glazed, it can 
 be broken down with diluted ammonia, or sometimes 
 merely a damp cloth will be sufficient. 
 
 So far as possible, letter with black India ink. 
 Carter's white ink is the best for lettering dark col- 
 ored cloths. It is sometimes difficult for a novice to 
 use white ink, but it can be handled satisfactorily if 
 one uses a stub pen which is kept perfectly clean and 
 is always wiped before being dipped in the ink. Shake
 
 194 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 the bottle often and add water if ink is too thick. 
 Gold ink should never be used. 
 
 When lettering is dry, apply shellac as described 
 under Labeling. 
 
 WITH TYPE 
 
 Some of the larger libraries have found it econ- 
 omy to have a binder's printing outfit for let- 
 tering call numbers on all books, even when the 
 library does not bind books. Such an outfit may be 
 used of course for lettering author and title, but there 
 will be little occasion to do this except in connection 
 with a regular bindery. Call numbers, however, are 
 so much more legible and permanent when put on 
 with type that it should always be done whenever the 
 number of accessions is sufficiently large to warrant 
 the employment of some person to do the work. It 
 does not, however, need experienced finishers and, if 
 time permits, may be done by regular library assis- 
 tants after some instruction and practice. It will be 
 discovered, however, that lettering in gold on cloth is 
 more difficult than on leather. For the benefit of 
 those who wish to try it the following description is 
 given. 
 
 Tools. The tools necessary are a pallet to hold the 
 type; four fonts of brass type (lead, or type other 
 than brass should never be used) ; long-bladed knife 
 with straight edge for cutting gold leaf ; cutting pad ; 
 gas burner similar to the burners on cook stoves; and
 
 REPAIRING, RECASING, RECOVERING, ETC. 195 
 
 a frame with wooden screws in which to hold the 
 book while it is being stamped. 
 
 Materials. The materials needed are the best 
 American gold leaf, cotton batting, sweet oil. some 
 specially prepared rubber for removing the excess gold 
 leaf, and glaire. 
 
 The tools or materials which are used exclusively 
 by binders can be obtained from any binders' supply 
 house. Glaire is easily made as follows: 
 
 Take whites of three eggs ; add three teaspoonfuls 
 of vinegar and beat until it is a light froth. Let stand 
 a few hours and strain through a piece of muslin into 
 a bottle. If kept corked glaire will keep for some 
 time. 
 
 Process, i. Place on finishing bench, backs up, 
 books on which call numbers are to be gilded. 
 
 2. With a small sponge, apply the glaire to the 
 part of the back which is to receive the call number, 
 taking care to draw the sponge evenly across the back, 
 leaving a straight line. If the application of glaire 
 makes that part of the book appear radically differ- 
 ent from the rest of the back, the glaire may be ap- 
 plied to the entire back. It should not be allowed 
 to run over on the sides. Allow the glaire to dry 
 thoroughly. 
 
 3. With a long-bladed knife, transfer a sheet of 
 gold leaf to the cutting pad which must be thoroughly 
 protected by screens from all draughts. If the gold 
 leaf does not lie unwrinkled on the cutting pad 
 breathe on it lightly. With the knife, cut the leaf in
 
 196 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 proper size for work to be done, being careful to 
 make the cuts clean, not ragged. 
 
 4. Arrange type in the pallet, beginning at the 
 right, and put type in the gas to heat. 
 
 5. Screw book, back up, firmly in the frame. 
 
 6. With cotton batting, apply sweet oil to the 
 part to be stamped, being careful to cover thoroughly 
 this surface with the oil. This is done to make the 
 gold stick. 
 
 7. Apply a piece of cotton, slightly oiled, to the 
 gold leaf which will instantly stick. It can then be 
 transferred to the book, where the sweet oil will hold 
 it securely. 
 
 8. Test the type for heat. A little practice will 
 soon teach the novice when the type is hot enough. 
 The object of heating the type is to make the gold 
 combine with the glaire in such a way as to cause the 
 gold to adhere. It is better to have the type too cold 
 rather than too hot. If it is too cold, the gold will 
 not stick and the work must be done over again ; if 
 too hot, it burns the leather or cloth and the damage 
 is irremediable. For cloth work the type can be used 
 hotter than for leather. 
 
 9. Apply type to the book, pressing down firmly. 
 The pressure makes an indentation. If the materials 
 are of the right quality, the work carefully done and 
 the type of the right degree of heat, the gold will be 
 firmly embedded. 
 
 10. With the specially prepared rubber remove 
 the waste gold. When the rubber has absorbed all
 
 REPAIRING, RECASING, RECOVERING, ETC. 197 
 
 the gold that it is capable of taking up, it may be sent 
 to a dealer who will refine it and give credit for the 
 gold which it contains. About one-third of the orig- 
 inal cost of the gold should be obtained from the sale 
 of the waste. 
 
 Whenever books are bound in light colored cloths 
 on which gold does not readily show use a black ink 
 specially made for this purpose. It is much easier to. 
 use than gold, since the ink is evenly spread on a 
 smooth, hard surface and the type is used cold. No 
 glaire is necessary. 
 
 14
 
 CHAPTER XI 
 MAGAZINE BINDERS 
 
 One of the vexing questions which properly comes 
 under the head of binding is that of magazine binders 
 used on current periodicals in reading rooms. The 
 binding of current numbers for circulation is described 
 on page 190. It must be admitted that no binder on 
 the market is perfectly satisfactory. Some hold the 
 periodicals satisfactorily but are hard to adjust. 
 Others are easy to adjust but the magazines slip out 
 easily, or can with ease be surreptitiously removed. 
 Some have keys which become lost or will not work ; 
 some are clumsy ; and some have projections which 
 scratch tables. All are hard to hold in the hands. On 
 an average a new binder is put on the market each 
 year with the assurance of the maker that all faults 
 have been eliminated. A trial soon convinces the 
 librarian that it is no better than others and that the 
 perfect binder does not exist. 
 
 For the small library the problem is- not an impor- 
 tant one, since it is entirely feasible in such libraries 
 to place current numbers without covers on reading 
 room tables, or to cover them with tough paper. Mr. 
 Dana advocates using most magazines without bind- 
 ers even in the reading room of a large library.
 
 200 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 Possibly this may be done advantageously in some 
 libraries, but it will depend upon the atmosphere of 
 the city, the character of those who use the library 
 and the ease with which assistants can keep all readers 
 under observation. Librarians for the most part will 
 continue to believe that a temporary binder of one 
 kind or another is necessary for current periodicals 
 in the general reading room. 
 
 Binders in the reading room serve two purposes. 
 They protect the magazine and they help to remind 
 readers that the magazines are public property. Some 
 magazines the Scientific American, for example 
 are very thin and may be easily folded and put into 
 an inside pocket. A binder does not prevent theft, 
 but its tendency is to reduce it. 
 
 The qualifications of a good binder are: 
 
 1. Ease of fastening, together with difficulty in 
 removing magazines by the uninitiated. 
 
 2. Comparative ease of holding in the hand. 
 
 3. Durability of surface and of device used for 
 fastening the magazine. 
 
 4. Preservation of the magazine without injury. 
 
 5. Firmness when finally fastened. 
 
 Even the best magazine binders are far from being 
 perfect in any of these requirements, except in ease 
 with which they are fastened. 
 
 There are many kinds of magazine binders. Mr. 
 Dana, in the second edition of his "Notes on book- 
 binding for libraries," mentions by name twelve differ- 
 ent makes; and as many more, some of which are 
 equally good, are known to the writer. But were
 
 MAGAZINE BINDERS 2OI 
 
 there twice as many it is probable that they would fall, 
 as they do now, into five classes. 
 
 1. Spring back. 
 
 2. Eyelet and tape. 
 
 3. Sewed. 
 
 4. Rod. 
 
 5. Clamp which is screwed up tight. 
 
 The well known spring-back variety is, in prin- 
 ciple, a semi-circular steel tube longer than the maga- 
 zine to be held, to which board sides are attached. 
 When the cover is closed the jaws of the steel are 
 close together. In order to insert the magazine the 
 covers are bent back toward each other. This opens 
 wide the jaws and the magazine is slipped in. When 
 the covers are released the steel tube is firmly fastened 
 to the back of the magazine. This kind of binder is 
 probably the easiest of all to adjust. It is, however, 
 equally easy to remove, is clumsy and is harder to 
 hold in the hand than others. 
 
 In the eyelet and tape class there are holes in the 
 back of the cover. In fastening the magazine, tape 
 or cord (generally a shoe string) is passed through 
 the center of the magazine, laced into the eyelet and 
 tied. The main objections to this kind of a binder 
 are that it takes some time to fasten them and the 
 magazine is generally loose in the binder when 
 fastened. 
 
 Binders which require sewing have holes in the 
 sides near the back. Instead, however, of passing the 
 cord through the center of the magazine, holes corre- 
 sponding to holes in the binder are punched directly
 
 202 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 through the magazine at the back, one near the head, 
 one near the tail and another in the middle. The 
 binder is then sewed on through these holes. The 
 chief merit of these binders is that they are inex- 
 pensive; but it takes longer to attach them than other 
 binders and the magazine is injured by the holes 
 which have been punched. 
 
 There are various kinds of binders which use steel 
 rods or bars through the center of the magazine. 
 Some use one rather heavy rod which is hinged at 
 one end, and hooked or fastened into a slot at the 
 other end when the magazine has been inserted. Some 
 have two or more thin steel rods hinged or pivoted 
 at one end and held by a pin or a lock at the other 
 end. And one at least has steel bars not permanently 
 attached, the ends of which are in the form of a semi- 
 circle, which are dropped between rigid uprights and 
 prevented from slipping off by caps screwed on the 
 uprights. 
 
 The writer knows of only two binders which use a 
 clamp which must be screwed tightly in order to hold 
 the magazine firmly. The great merit of these binders 
 is that they hold the magazine firmly, so that it can 
 by no possibility be removed except by the assistant 
 who has the key. They are, however, clumsy and 
 unduly large at the back and it takes some time to 
 fasten them to the magazine. 
 
 Taking into consideration all points of excellence 
 it is probable that some form of rod binder is the best. 
 Rod binders are not hard to apply ; they require some 
 effort to remove them those which lock cannot be
 
 MAGAZINE BINDERS 2O3 
 
 removed without a key; they are firm when applied; 
 and many of them do not injure the magazine. 
 Nearly every librarian has his own personal preference 
 among such binders. 
 
 Since binders receive very hard wear it is impor- 
 tant that they should be made of good material. Those 
 which are used for popular magazines should have 
 cowhide backs and buckram or imitation leather 
 (keratol or fabrikoid) sides. A full leather binding 
 would help solve the question of dirt, but it is equally 
 well and less expensively solved by using imitation 
 leather on the side. In reading rooms frequented 
 only by educated persons binders with flexible leather 
 covers are desirable and are greatly enjoyed by read- 
 ers. The cheaper grades of cloth, such as are used 
 by the publishers, should never be used, as they soon 
 wear through at the edges and corners. In many 
 cases it is wise to use pigskin or morocco on the 
 back, though if this is done, the cloth sides and the 
 boards themselves may become disreputable before 
 the back is worn. In nearly all binders the mechan- 
 ism can be removed from the boards when they be- 
 come shabby, and new covers attached. This will 
 save some of the expense of a new binder. A clever 
 mender can do such work so that it need not be sent 
 to a regular library binder. The boards should not 
 be made of mill boards, but of semi-tar or tar boards.
 
 CHAPTER XII 
 PAMPHLETS 
 
 Fortunately it is not necessary to decide here the 
 ever-vexing question "When is a pamphlet not a pam- 
 phlet?" From the binding viewpoint any printed 
 matter of more than four pages which does not have a 
 stiff cover is a pamphlet and it is within the province 
 of the binding assistant to prepare it for the shelves. 
 
 Unbound material in libraries is of three kinds: 
 periodicals; serial publications which are not peri- 
 odicals such as annual reports, bulletins of societies or 
 government bureaus, etc.; and separate pamphlets not 
 numbered, of a monographic character. The binding 
 of periodicals forms part of the regular routine and is 
 discussed elsewhere in this book. 
 
 Annual reports and other publications of a serial 
 character should be filed in pamphlet boxes on the 
 regular shelves at the end of the bound set. When a 
 sufficient number of reports have collected they may 
 be bound in cloth by decades or half-decades, accord- 
 ing to the thickness of the reports. In many libraries 
 most of such publications need not be bound at all, but 
 will answer every purpose if wrapped in paper and 
 lettered by hand. Serials other than annual reports 
 generally give some indication of which numbers
 
 206 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 should be bound together, if bound at all. If there 
 be no change of numbering or no completion of vol- 
 ume numbers to indicate a separation, they should be 
 arbitrarily grouped in volumes of a convenient size, 
 conforming if possible to one or more calendar years, 
 and bound or wrapped in paper. If series are not to 
 be kept together they should be treated as described in 
 the following paragraphs. 
 
 Monographic works in unbound form range in size 
 from those of a dozen pages to those of several hun- 
 dred. Probably the best arrangement for a large part 
 of this material is to assign a subject heading or a 
 class number and keep in a vertical file alphabetically 
 or by class number. With this the binding depart- 
 ment has no concern, but there are always a number 
 of pamphlets which have permanent value for the 
 library and which should be treated in the same way 
 as a book with stiff covers. 
 
 Undoubtedly the cheapest way to prepare pam- 
 phlets not over one-half inch thick for the shelves 
 is to put them into Gaylord binders. These are made 
 of board sides connected at the back by a strip of 
 cloth and having on the inside gummed flaps which 
 can be attached to the back of the pamphlet. There 
 are thirty different sizes ranging from 5 by 7 inches 
 to i2 l / 2 by 17 inches. They are made in two qualities, 
 the photo-mount costing from $3.15 to $13.60 per hun- 
 dred and press board costing from $4.25 to $17.60 a 
 hundred. 1 If the pamphlet has a cover as well as a 
 title page, the cover should be taken off and pasted to 
 
 1 Prices increased 10 per cent April 10, 1916.
 
 PAMPHLETS 207 
 
 the outside of the front cover of the binder. In addi- 
 tion to moistening and attaching the gummed flaps, it 
 will be found necessary in many cases either to wire 
 through the back of the pamphlet with some kind of 
 a stapling machine, or to sew through as described 
 on page 190 for attaching red rope manila to circulat- 
 ing magazines. 
 
 When the pamphlet is firmly attached in the binder 
 it should be lettered in white ink along the back. If 
 the pamphlet is very thin it will be necessary to letter 
 author, title and call number along the back edge of 
 the front cover, close to the back. If the original 
 cover has not been pasted on the outside it will also 
 be necessary to letter author and title across the front 
 cover. 
 
 Pamphlets which are too big to go into the binders 
 can be bound in regular book form if their use will 
 warrant the expense. If the use will be slight they 
 can be made very serviceable by using the red rope 
 manila as described on page 190. 
 
 Very large libraries keep all pamphlets perman- 
 ently. Those which are not sufficiently important 
 to treat as books are generally kept in classified order 
 in temporary cases. When a sufficient number have 
 been collected on any subject they may be bound to- 
 gether in volumes of proper size. So far as possible 
 pamphlets of the same size should be bound together in 
 cloth, but they may vary a little if they are level on 
 top. The expense of binding in this way is, of course, 
 much less than if each pamphlet had been put in a
 
 208 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 binder. Smaller libraries may perhaps be well advised 
 to bind in this way pamphlets having a local interest 
 which must be kept permanently. 
 
 It is not necessary to discuss here the various kinds 
 of temporary homes of pamphlets, such as manila 
 folders, envelopes, wooden or pasteboard boxes, Bal- 
 lard klips, etc. They all have their uses, and each 
 librarian must work out whatever scheme seems best 
 to him.
 
 CHAPTER XIII 
 BINDERY IN THE LIBRARY BUILDING 
 
 How large an amount of binding must a library 
 have before it becomes economical to establish a bind- 
 ery in the library building? This question is fre- 
 quently asked and is difficult to answer. In the first 
 place, local conditions must be taken into considera- 
 tion. Is there in the same city a library bindery which 
 does satisfactory work at reasonable prices, or must 
 work be sent a long distance away? Is there ample 
 room in the building and is it easily adapted to binding 
 purposes? Can a good foreman be employed? Is 
 the local rate of wages so high as to make the cost 
 of the binding in the library equal the cost in a good 
 bindery outside the city? These are some of the 
 questions which must be considered. 
 
 Some of the advantages in having a bindery in the 
 building are as follows: 
 
 1. It is more convenient. When books are much 
 needed they can be found and generally used, even if 
 incompletely bound. 
 
 2. There is less chance of losing books. When 
 books are sent to a binder who does the work of other 
 libraries also there is always a chance of loss. The 
 binder, of course, is responsible, but one would always 
 rather have the book than the cash value.
 
 210 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 3. There is no chance of damage to books in 
 transit. 
 
 4. Repairs which are too difficult for the ordinary 
 library mender to make can easily be done in the 
 library bindery at slight cost. 
 
 5. The books need not as a rule spend so long a 
 time in the bindery. If perchance the bindery be- 
 comes clogged with extra work the librarian can rush 
 the books that are needed most. If such books are in 
 another bindery, especially when that bindery is out- 
 side the city, it is difficult to get the books that are 
 needed first. 
 
 6. There is a certain amount of competition 
 which works to advantage if part of the books have 
 to be bound outside. The outside binder knows that 
 the librarian who operates a bindery in his own build- 
 ing knows something about the cost of binding, and 
 he realizes that unless his prices are reasonable and his 
 work good he need not expect to be favored. 
 
 7. The librarian can at all times inspect materials 
 on hand and see the books in the process of binding. 
 The bindery outside the building can sometimes sub- 
 stitute inferior materials without fear of detection for 
 many months. 
 
 8. When the work reaches a certain amount it 
 can be done at reduced cost in the library, since the 
 ordinary profits of the bindery will accrue to the 
 library. 
 
 9. It is much easier to make experiments with 
 new materials or new processes. While the outside
 
 211 
 
 binder does not care to get a small quantity of a riew 
 material, the library which owns its own bindery can 
 do so easily. 
 
 10. A bindery in the library can do much work, 
 such as the mounting of maps or photographs, gilding 
 of call numbers and book-mending, which needs skilled 
 workmen. Such work frequently remains undone, 
 either because the regular library force has no time 
 to do it or because it seems unwise to send it outside 
 the library. 
 
 Such are some of the benefits, but only the larger 
 libraries which bind many thousands of volumes can 
 take advantage of them successfully from the financial 
 standpoint. In order to be administered economically 
 there must be sufficient work to keep several workmen 
 busy. It probably is not wise to open a bindery when 
 the annual expenditure for binding is less than $4,000. 
 
 There are two ways in which a library bindery 
 may be administered. Under the first plan the library 
 buys all material and hires all the workmen, employing 
 a foreman on salary to take charge. A schedule of 
 prices which is lower than the prices paid to outside 
 binders should be adopted, and the total value of 
 binding in a year based on this schedule must equal 
 the cost of material, wages and depreciation on the 
 value of the plant. Under this plan the work may be 
 unexcelled in quality, but there is no incentive to 
 produce it in quantity. So long as the work turned 
 out balances the outlay the employees, unless they are 
 exceptionally conscientious, are satisfied. There is
 
 212 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 also the added difficulty of finding a competent fore- 
 man. Any man who is able to manage a library 
 bindery successfully is able to manage any bindery 
 successfully and he will not be willing to work for 
 the salary which the library can afford to pay. The 
 librarian himself, harassed as he is with many prob- 
 lems, must of necessity leave such matters as the pur- 
 chase of material and the hiring of workmen to the 
 foreman in whom he must have implicit confidence. 
 The librarian cannot assume the same attitude toward 
 his bindery foreman that the proprietor of a regular 
 bindery may assume. He is not skilled in the craft, 
 does not know about materials, especially leathers, 
 and cannot direct the work. 
 
 Under the second plan the library lets the work 
 out by contract to some binder who agrees to do the 
 work in the building. The contractor is under no 
 expense for rent, heat and light, and in arranging 
 prices this is taken into consideration. It is obvious 
 that it is to the interest of the binder to turn out as 
 large a number of books as possible. Since the 
 librarian has safeguarded the library in the contract 
 by specifying that all materials and work must meet 
 with his approval, this plan is more advantageous to 
 him than the former plan. The contract should allow 
 for frequent revision of schedule. 
 
 Under the first plan the librarian will be obliged 
 to buy all machinery, tools and materials, and to hire 
 the workmen. Under the second plan he may have 
 to buy the machinery and tools, but the purchase of
 
 BINDERY IN THE LIBRARY BUILDING 
 
 213 
 
 materials and the hiring of labor will be in the hands 
 of the contractor. 
 
 A good binding plant will contain the articles in 
 the following list. Those marked * are necessary, 
 even when the amount of work turned out is small : 
 
 * i sewing frame 
 
 * i standing press 
 
 * 4 dozen press-boards 
 
 (all sizes) 
 
 * i glue pot 
 
 * 3 hammers 
 
 * i board shears 
 
 * i lever paper cutter 
 
 1 perforating machine 
 
 2 extra cutting knives 
 
 * i hammering-block with 
 
 plate 
 i grindstone 
 
 * i paring stone 
 
 * i oil stone 
 
 * 2 pairs of shears 
 
 * 2 paring knives 
 
 * 8 bone folders 
 *4 brushes 
 
 * i monkey wrench 
 i sandstone 
 
 * 2 saws 
 
 * i book-backing ma- 
 
 chine 
 
 * 2 dozen sewing needles 
 
 i 
 *i 
 
 i 
 *i 
 
 i 
 
 * T 
 
 ruler 
 
 screw driver 
 lying press 
 finishing press 
 steel square 
 pair pliers 
 2 straight-edges 
 *3 awls 
 
 * i iron divider 
 
 * i oil can 
 
 * i paste bucket 
 
 * i complete set of brass 
 
 type 
 
 * i pallet 
 
 * i gold cushion 
 
 * i gold knife 
 
 * 6 gilding rolls 
 
 * i imprint stamp 
 
 * i single fillet 
 
 two-line fillet 
 finishing gas stove 
 i ten-drawer type cab- 
 inet 
 
 i flat agate polisher 
 i flat steel polisher 
 
 i 
 
 *i 
 
 * 
 
 15
 
 214 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 I round agate polisher * i finisher's bench 
 
 i gas stove for heating i small table 
 
 glue i band nippers 
 
 * i forwarder's bench i creaser 
 
 * i sewing table 
 
 The total cost of the plant will vary in various 
 sections of the country, but it ought not to cost more 
 than $800. If second-hand cutting machines, benches, 
 etc., can be obtained it is possible that the cost may 
 be reduced to $650 or less. The St. Louis Public 
 Library recently equipped a bindery at a cost of $587. 
 During the first year, with a force of fifteen, it turned 
 out work to the value of $9,609.
 
 APPENDIXES
 
 APPENDIX A 
 
 SPECIFICATIONS OF THE U. S. BUREAU 
 OF STANDARDS FOR BOOK CLOTHS 
 
 FABRIC 
 
 The fabric shall be made from first-quality staple cotton, 
 uniformly woven and of a grade known as "firsts." The 
 weave shall be two up and two down in the warp and one 
 up and one down in the weft. 
 
 The gray cloth shall consist of from 33 to 36 threads 
 per centimeter (85 to 90 per inch) in the warp, and 12 
 to 15 threads per centimeter (30 to 38 per inch) in the weft.. 
 
 The surface shall be finished smooth and hard and 
 show no tendency to stick when folded upon itself. 
 
 THICKNESS, TENSILE STRENGTH AND WEIGHT 
 
 The thickness of the finished fabric shall not exceed 
 0.30 millimeter (0.012 inch) or be less than 0.20 milli- 
 meter (0.008 inch). The tensile strength of the gray cloth 
 shall be not less than 18 kilograms per centimeter (100 
 pounds per inch) of width in the warp, and 9 kilograms 
 per centimeter (50 pounds per inch) in the weft. The 
 average value for the warp and weft in the finished fabric 
 must show an increase over the average value for the 
 warp and weft in the gray cloth of at least 10 per cent 
 of the strength of the gray cloth. 
 
 The finished fabric, when dry, shall weigh not more than 
 250 grams per square meter (0.5 pound per yard), or less 
 than 200 grams per square meter (0.4 pound per yard).
 
 2l8 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 ABSORPTION OF MOISTURE 
 
 At a normal relative humidity of 65 per cent it shall 
 not absorb more than 5 per cent of moisture, or expand (an 
 average of both directions) to exceed 0.45 per cent, and 
 when subjected in a closed case to a saturated atmosphere 
 for two hours at a temperature of 20 C. (68 F.) shall 
 not absorb more than 10 per cent of moisture or expand 
 (an average of both directions) to exceed 2 per cent. All 
 increases to be computed on the basis of the dry weight 
 and dimensions. 
 
 FOLDING ENDURANCE 
 
 The folding endurance, as determined by the Schopper 
 folder, shall be not less than 65,000 double folds for the 
 warp and not less than 10,000 for the weft. 
 
 COLOR 
 
 Before coating, the fabric must be dyed with a purely 
 mineral or inorganic color (such as iron salts), so as to 
 imitate the color of the finished cloth, but somewhat lighter 
 in shade, so as to give the desired "linen" effect. All coal- 
 tar, aniline, vegetable, or other organic dyes and lakes must 
 be strictly excluded from both fabric and coating, even in 
 traces; except where necessary to match color, lake may 
 be used in red, blue, or brown. The following substances 
 must be also excluded: Chrome yellow and other chromates, 
 ultramarine, browns containing bituminous or other organic 
 matter, compounds of lead and arsenic. 
 
 The color of the finished fabric should be slightly darker 
 than the standard sample, which will be furnished on appli- 
 cation, and it must not show the slightest change of color 
 after exposure under prescribed conditions to direct sun- 
 light, or to the action of ammonia gas, sulphuretted-hydro- 
 gen gas, sulphur-dioxide gas, or illuminating gas.
 
 APPENDIX 2IQ 
 
 RESISTANCE TO MOLD AND INSECTS 
 
 The finished fabric shall be immune to the growth of 
 mold or the attack of insects. 
 
 TESTS 
 
 Physical and chemical tests to verify the properties 
 required by these specifications will be made according to 
 the "Standard method for testing book cloths" as used by 
 the Bureau of Standards, copies of which can be obtained 
 on application.
 
 APPENDIX B 
 
 READING LIST ON BINDING 
 
 Adam, Paul. Practical bookbinding. 1903. Van Nostrand. 
 
 $1.25. 
 
 A translation of a German work. 
 
 American library association. Committee on bookbinding. 
 Binding for libraries. 1915. A. L. A. Publishing Board. 
 $.15. (Library handbook No. 5. Second edition, revised.) 
 Binding specifications which may be used by large as well as small 
 
 libraries. 
 
 Bailey, A. L. Bookbinding. 1911. A. L. A. Publishing 
 Board. $.10. 
 Preprint of Manual of library economy, Chapter 26. 
 
 Bindery talk. 1912-13. v. 1-2. All published. 
 
 A periodical published by W. E. Reavis, Los Angeles, California, 
 covering various phases of library binding. 
 
 Bliss, H. E. Better bookbinding for libraries. Library 
 Journal, 1905, 30:849-57. 
 Brief article on methods and materials. 
 
 Brown, J. D. Bookbinding and repairing. In his Manual 
 of library economy, pp. 328-48. 
 Valuable chiefly for its section on lettering. 
 
 Brown, M. W. Mending and repair of books. A. L. A. 
 Publishing Board. $.15. (Library handbook No. 6.) 
 
 Caldwell, M. R. Preparing for the binder. Public Li- 
 braries, 1906, 11:302-3. 
 
 Chivers, Cedric. Paper and binding of lending library 
 books. American Library Association. Bulletin. 1909, 
 
 3 : 231-59. 
 
 Also published separately by Mr. Chivers. A record of experiments 
 and tests of modern book papers.
 
 222 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 Chivers, Cedric. Relative value of leathers and other bind- 
 ing materials. 1911. Published by the author. 
 A record of tests of leathers. Practically the same article will be 
 
 found in the Bulletin of the American Library Association for 1911, 
 
 p. 164. 
 
 Cockerell, Douglas. Bookbinding and the care of books. 
 
 1902. Appleton. $1.25. 
 
 Best general book on binding processes, but does not cover all 
 library requirements. 
 
 Coutts, H. T., and Stephen, G. A. Manual of library book- 
 binding. 1911. Libraco Limited. 7s. 6d. net. 
 A valuable book for all libraries. Gives the English point of view. 
 
 Crane, W. J. E. Bookbinding for amateurs. 1903. Scrib- 
 
 ner. $.65. 
 Cundall, Joseph, ed. On bookbindings, ancient and modern. 
 
 1881. Bell, Lond. $12. 
 
 Will be used mainly by those interested in the history and artistic 
 side of bookbinding. 
 
 Dana, J. C. Notes on bookbinding for libraries. Ed. 2. 
 1910. Library Bureau. $i. 
 The best single book for the librarian. 
 
 Drury, F. K. W. On protecting pamphlets. Library Jour- 
 nal, 1910, 35: 118-19. 
 
 Field, C. Book repairing. California News Notes, 2 : 105-8. 
 
 Hasluck, P. N., ed. Bookbinding. 1903. McKay. $.50. 
 
 Practical handbook. Does not cover strong binding for libraries. 
 
 Home, H. P. Binding of books. 1894. Scribner. $2. 
 For those interested in the artistic side of binding. 
 
 Hulme, E. W., and others. Leather for libraries. 1905. 
 Library Supply Co., London. 2s. 6d. net. 
 
 Lowe, J. A. Permanent book marking. Library Journal. 
 1910, 35 : 15-17. 
 
 Macleod, R. D. Preservation of books in libraries. Li- 
 brary World, 11:256, 331, 368, 417. 
 
 Deals with general repairs, etc. The second part (p. 331) is espe- 
 cially valuable for the large number of cleaning recipes.
 
 APPENDIX 223 
 
 Memoranda relative to binding publications for distribution 
 to state and territorial libraries and depositories. 1908. 
 U. S. Superintendent of Documents. 
 An account of the tests of book cloths made by the Bureau of 
 
 Standards. 
 
 Philip, A. J. The business of bookbinding from the view- 
 point of the binder, the publisher, the librarian and the 
 general reader. 1912. S. Paul. 6s. net. 
 In spite of the title the viewpoint is that of the librarian. 
 
 Prideaux, S. T. Historical sketch of bookbindings. 1893. 
 
 Lawrence, London. $1.50 net. 
 Sawyer, H. P. How to care for books in a library. 1912. 
 
 Democrat Printing Co., Madison, Wis. $.10. 
 
 A good article on mending. 
 
 Society of arts. Report of the Committee on leathers for 
 
 bookbinding. 1905. Bell. IDS. 6d. 
 Stephen, G. A. Commercial bookbinding. 1910. Stonhill, 
 
 London. 25. 6d. 
 
 The best book on this subject. 
 
 . Machine book-sewing. 1908. Aberdeen University 
 
 Press. 
 
 Reprinted from the Library association record, June 1908. 
 
 Notes on materials for library bookbinding. Li- 
 
 brary Assistant, 1905-7, 5:143-6, 162-4. 
 
 Swezey, A. D. Binding records. Public Libraries, 1909, 14 : 
 5-7- 
 
 Worcester (Mass.) County law library. Leather preserva- 
 tion. 1911. 
 . A small binding plant in the building. 1912. 
 
 Zaehnsdorf, Joseph. Bookbinding. Macmillan. $1.50. 
 
 Zahn, Otto. On art binding. 1904. Toof & Co., Memphis. 
 $1.50. 
 By a well known artistic bookbinder.
 
 APPENDIX C 
 
 LIST OF TECHNICAL TERMS 
 
 In this list terms relating to paper, to materials 
 described in the body of this work and to historical 
 bindings, and terms seldom used have been omitted. 
 
 Acid free leather. Leather which is manufactured 
 without using acid. As interpreted by some dealers, it 
 means leather from which all acid has been removed. 
 
 Aldine style. Decorative design consisting of solid 
 face ornaments without shading. First used by Aldus 
 and other early Italian printers. 
 
 Ail-along. In hand-sewing when the thread passes 
 from kettlestitch to kettlestitch in each signature it is 
 sewed ail-along. 
 
 Antique. See Blind-tooled. 
 
 Arabesque. Decorative design consisting of many in- 
 terwoven lines and curves arranged in conventional pat- 
 terns. Sometimes applied to a design consisting of 
 interwoven plants, animals, birds, etc. 
 
 Arming press. See Blocking press. 
 
 Asterisk. This well known sign is sometimes used to 
 indicate that the printed matter on which it appears is 
 to take the place of pages previously printed. 
 
 Awl. See Bodkin. 
 
 Azure tools. Tools with a series of horizontal lines 
 parallel on their faces. 
 
 Back lining. Cloth or paper glued to the back of a 
 book to help hold the signatures together. 
 
 Backing. Forcing over the folds on each side at the 
 back to form grooves into which boards fit, forming the 
 joint.
 
 226 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 Backing boards. Used for backing or forming the 
 joint. Made of hardwood sometimes faced with iron. 
 Have a beveled edge, over which the paper is forced by 
 hammering and are thicker at this edge than at the other, 
 so that when placed one on each side of the book and 
 all are placed in the lying press, the power of the press 
 is brought to bear on the part of the book nearest the 
 'back. 
 
 Backing hammer. Has a broad, flat face and short 
 handle. Used in rounding and backing. 
 
 Backing machine. Machine run by power used in 
 edition work for backing books. 
 
 Backing press. A press having vertical steel plates 
 brought together with a screw. When the book is placed 
 in it with the back slightly projecting it can be backed in 
 exactly the same way as if backing boards were used. 
 
 Band-driver. Used in forwarding to eliminate irregu- 
 larities of raised bands. 
 
 Band nipper. Pincers used after leather has been put 
 on over raised bands in order to straighten them. 
 
 Banding. Decorating by means of horizontal stripes. 
 
 Bark skiver. Tanned with oak bark. 
 
 Bastard title. See Half title. 
 
 Beading. Small twist or roll formed when winding 
 the cotton or silk in head-banding. 
 
 Beating. Process of flattening and smoothing out the 
 folded sheets to make the leaves lie closely together. 
 
 Beating hammer. Heavy, short-handled hammer used 
 for beating books to make the leaves lie closely together. 
 
 Beating stone. Stone or iron bed on which books 
 are beaten. 
 
 Beveled boards. Heavy boards with beveled edges, 
 sometimes used for the sides of very heavy or large books. 
 
 Binder, i. Case used for the temporary protection of 
 pamphlets and periodicals. Can be detached and used on 
 succeeding numbers. 2. One whose business it is to bind 
 books. '
 
 APPENDIX 227 
 
 Binder's title. Title lettered on the back of a book. 
 Frequently differs from that on the title page. 
 
 Binder's board. See Boards. 
 
 Binding slip. Sheet of paper containing instructions 
 to the binder inserted in each book sent to the bindery. 
 
 Blanks. Books with blank leaves of good paper used 
 for keeping records which are more or less permanent. 
 The binding of such books is a special trade. 
 
 Bleed. When books are trimmed so that part of the 
 print is cut off they are said to bleed. 
 
 Blind-tooled. Books on which impressions have been 
 made by tools without the use of gilt are blind-tooled. 
 Sometimes called "Antique" tooling. 
 
 Block. The solid metal stamp used for impressing 
 a design on a book cover. 
 
 Blocking. Stamping the design in gold or other ma- 
 terial on book covers. 
 
 Blocking press. Used in stamping designs on cloth 
 book covers or back. Known also as stamping press and 
 arming press. 
 
 Board papers. The parts of end papers pasted to 
 the boards. 
 
 Board shears. Heavy shears with a gauge, for cut- 
 ting boards for the sides of books. 
 
 Boards. Boards for the sides of books are called 
 cloth board, binder's board, mill board, tar board. They 
 are called boards in the full size and also when cut for 
 sides. 
 
 Bodkin. An awl used for punching holes in boards 
 through which the bands are laced. 
 
 Body. Main part of the book, from Chapter I to 
 the end of the text. 
 
 Bolt. The folded edge of signatures at the head, fore 
 edge and tail of books. 
 
 Book card, or Book slip. Card kept in the book, 
 used in charging the book when it is borrowed. 
 
 Book label. See Label.
 
 228 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 Book pocket. A pocket made of paper, generally 
 pasted on the last fly-leaf to hold the book card when 
 the book is on the shelf, or to hold the reader's card 
 when the book is borrowed. 
 
 Bosses. Metal ornaments fastened on the boards of 
 books. 
 
 Broken, i. Paper folded over. 2. The back of a book 
 which has been cracked open from head to tail is broken. 
 
 Broken up (or over). Plates are broken up when 
 they are folded over a short distance from the back before 
 being placed in the book. 
 
 Burnish. The gloss produced by the application of a 
 burnisher to the edges of a book. 
 
 Burnisher. Piece of agate or blood-stone set in 
 handles and used to produce a gloss on the edges of 
 books. 
 
 Calendered paper. Paper with a highly polished sur- 
 face. 
 
 Cancels. Leaves containing errors which are to be 
 replaced with corrected pages. The replacements are 
 frequently marked with an asterisk. 
 
 Canvas. Same as duck. See page 80. 
 
 Caps. Coverings which protect the edges of books 
 during the processes of covering and finishing. 
 
 Case. i. A cover for a book made independently of 
 the book, i. e. the boards are not laced in. 2. Cover 
 made to fit over book already bound in order to protect it. 
 
 Case bindings. Books in which the boards and cov- 
 ering materials are made into a case and the book glued 
 into it. Term generally applied to commercial work, 
 which is practically all done by machinery. 
 
 Casing-in. The operation of putting a sewed and for- 
 warded book into its case. 
 
 Catchword. In old books and in a few modern books 
 the first word of a page is printed under the last line on 
 the preceding page. This is called the catchword.
 
 APPENDIX 229 
 
 Center tools. Specially-cut tools for ornamenting the 
 centers of panels. 
 
 Circuit edges. Projecting flexible covers turned over 
 to protect the leaves of the book. Used almost wholly on 
 Bibles and prayer books. Sometimes called divinity 
 edges. 
 
 Clasp. A catch for fastening the covers of a book 
 together. 
 
 Clearing-out. The process of removing the waste 
 paper and paring away superfluous leather on the inside 
 of the covers before pasting down end papers. 
 
 Cloth boards, i. Boards covered with cloth. 2. 
 Boards used for the sides are sometimes called cloth 
 boards instead of mill boards. 
 
 Collation. An examination of a book to see if it is 
 complete. May be done by signatures before book is 
 bound. Must be done page by page in books which are 
 to be rebound. 
 
 Combs. An instrument with wire teeth used in 
 marbling. 
 
 Compensating guards. Short stubs bound in the back 
 to equalize space taken up by thick folded plates. 
 
 Creaser. The tool used in marking on each side of 
 raised bands. Generally made of steel. 
 
 Cropped. Term applied to books which have been 
 trimmed too much. 
 
 Crushed. Term applied to leather, generally mo- 
 rocco, which has been pressed so that the surface, natur- 
 ally grained, is made smooth. 
 
 Cut edges. See Edges cut. 
 
 Cut flush. In very cheap binding the book is trimmed 
 after the cover is on and edges of boards are cut flush 
 with the leaves. 
 
 Cutter, or Cutting machine. A machine used for 
 trimming the edges of books. Sometimes called guillo- 
 tine. 
 
 16
 
 230 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 Cutting boards. Boards similar to backing boards, 
 except that they are not beveled. Used in trimming. 
 
 Cutting in boards. See In boards. 
 
 Cutting press. The "lying press" turned over so that 
 the. runners are uppermost. 
 
 Deckle edge. The rough untrimmed edge of hand- 
 made paper. 
 
 Dentelle. A form of book ornament which sup- 
 posedly represents lace. 
 
 Derome. A style of ornament having dentelle border 
 with small birds among the arabesques. 
 
 Diaper. A form of ornament consisting of a small 
 pattern repeated in geometrical form. 
 
 Divinity calf. Dark brown calfskin blind-stamped 
 and without gilding, formerly used in binding religious 
 books. 
 
 Divinity edges. See Circuit edges. 
 
 Die. An engraved stamp used for stamping a design. 
 
 Double. See Doublure. 
 
 Doubled. A design is doubled when the finisher tries 
 to make a second impression and the tool does not quite 
 follow the lines of the first impression. 
 
 Doublure. The lined and decorated inside face of 
 boards on fine bindings. When so lined the cover is 
 said to be "double." 
 
 Dummy, i. A book made up of blank leaves to show 
 style of binding and grade of workmanship. 2. A piece 
 of leather or cloth mounted on a board to show exact 
 size and lettering of a periodical. 
 
 Duodecimo. Book printed on paper folded into twelve 
 leaves. Generally written iamo. Loosely applied to 
 books from six to eight inches high. 
 
 Dutch metal. An imitation of gold leaf which soon 
 tarnishes. 
 
 Edges cut. A book which has all edges trimmed 
 smooth.
 
 APPENDIX 231 
 
 Edges gilt. All edges trimmed smooth and gilded. 
 
 Edges opened. A book which has the folds of leaves 
 cut by hand with a paper knife, has its edges opened. 
 
 Edges rolled. The edges of the covers are marked 
 with a roll. 
 
 Edges trimmed. Edges cut somewhat, but not enough 
 to cut all the folds. 
 
 Edges uncut. Uncut edges have not been trimmed in 
 any way, though they may have been opened with a paper 
 knife. 
 
 Edition de luxe. Fine editions of books printed on 
 large paper and handsomely bound. Many books so- 
 called are in reality cheaply bound. 
 
 Eighteenmo. A book printed on paper folded into 
 eighteen leaves. Not often found. 
 
 Elephant folio. See Folio. 
 
 Embossing. The process of producing raised designs 
 by means of stamps. Used in imitating leathers. 
 
 End papers. Folded sheets at the beginning and end 
 of books, half of which are pasted to the boards. Some- 
 time^s called lining papers. 
 
 Eve style. Decorative design consisting of geo- 
 metrical figures joined by interlaced circles. The figures 
 contain flowers and the space surrounding them contains 
 scroll work and branches of laurel and palm. 
 
 Extra binding. Trade term for the best work. 
 
 Fanfare style. Leafy spirals interwoven with a deli- 
 cate tracery over the cover. 
 
 Fast. Colors are fast to sunlight if they do not fade; 
 to water if they do not wash off. 
 
 Fillet, i. Plain lines stamped upon the back or cover 
 of the book. 2. The tool with which the work is done. 
 
 Filling. See Weft. 
 
 Finishing, i. All processes after the book leaves the 
 hand of the forwarder are known as finishing processes. 
 2. The ornaments stamped on a book.
 
 232 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 Finishing press. .A small wooden press with wooden 
 screws which holds a book with the back up. 
 
 Finishing stove. A small gas or electric stove used 
 for heating finishing tools. 
 
 Flexible. A form of binding in which the book is 
 sewed on raised bands, the thread being passed entirely 
 around the bands. 
 
 Flush cut. See Cut flush. 
 
 Fly leaves. Blank leaves at the beginning and end of 
 the book between end papers and the book itself. 
 
 Folder, i. Small flat piece of bone used in folding 
 sheets and in other binding processes. 3. Person engaged 
 in folding sheets. 
 
 Folding machines. Power machine for folding sheets. 
 
 Folio, i. A book printed on paper folded in two 
 leaves four pages. Loosely applied to books over fifteen 
 inches high. Very large books are sometimes called 
 elephant folios. 2. Consecutive page numbers of a book. 
 
 Fore-edge. The front edge of the leaves of a book. 
 
 Font. The complete number of letters, figures, etc., 
 forming a set of type. 
 
 Format. Size and shape of a book. 
 
 Forwarding. I. All processes between sewing and 
 finishing. 2. The department which takes charge of 
 books during these processes. Those who work in it are 
 called forwarders. 
 
 Foxed. Books having leaves stained by dampness are 
 said to be foxed. 
 
 French guard. The back edge of an illustration turned 
 over and folded around the adjoining signature. 
 
 French joint. Joint formed by setting the boards a 
 short distance away from the back. See page 46. 
 
 French morocco. A very inferior quality of levant 
 morocco. Many skins so-called are sheep skins or cow- 
 hide. 
 
 Frontispiece. Illustration facing the title page. 
 
 Full-bound. Term applies to books entirely covered,
 
 APPENDIX 233 
 
 back and sides, with the same material, whether cloth or 
 leather. 
 
 Gascon style. The distinguishing characteristic of this 
 style of decoration is that dotted lines are used instead of 
 lines which are continuous. 
 
 Gathering. Collecting the folded sheets, or signa- 
 tures, in the order in which they are bound. 
 
 Gaufre edges. Edges which have had impressions 
 made by finishing tools after the edges have been gilded. 
 
 Gauge. A tool used for obtaining the correct size of 
 a volume in order to mark it on boards for squaring. 
 
 Gilding press. Same as the finishing press. 
 
 Gilt edge. See Edges gilt. 
 
 Gilt tops. Top edges gilded. 
 
 Glaire. A liquid made by beating whites of eggs. 
 Used in lettering and gilding. See page 195. 
 
 Goffered edges. See Gaufre edges. 
 
 Gold cushion. Leather cushion on which the finisher 
 cuts gold leaf. 
 
 Gold knife. A long straight knife used in cutting 
 gold leaf. 
 
 Gold leaf. Gold beaten very thin, used for lettering 
 and gilding. 
 
 Gouge. A finishing tool used to stamp the segment 
 of a circle on a book. 
 
 Grain. The outer surface of a piece of leather from 
 which the hair has been removed. Generally used with 
 adjectives which indicate the appearance of the grain in 
 question. 
 
 Graining, i. Process of "bringing up" the natural 
 grain of leather by artificial means. 2. Process of em- 
 bossing leather to produce a fictitious grain. 
 
 Grater. Tool used for rubbing backs after they are 
 paste-washed. 
 
 Grolier. An elaborate style of ornament consisting 
 of scroll work with interwoven squares, circles and dia- 
 monds, parts of the design being studded with gold dots.
 
 234 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 Grooves. Projections at the back against which 
 boards rest to form the joint. Made by the backing 
 .hammer. Sometimes called joints. 
 
 Guards, i. Narrow strips of paper bound in books 
 to which plates or leaves are attached later. 2. Narrow 
 strips of cloth or paper used to reinforce the folds of 
 signatures, or pasted to single leaves and folded around 
 adjoining signatures. 
 
 Guides. The grooves in which the plough moves on 
 the face of the cutting press. 
 
 Guillotine. See Cutter, or Cutting machine. 
 
 Half-bound. Term indicating that leather is used on 
 the back, with cloth or paper on the sides. If small 
 pieces of leather are placed on the corners the book is 
 still half-bound. If the corner pieces are large the book 
 is three-quarters bound. 
 
 Half-title. Brief title on the leaf preceding the main 
 title page. Also called Bastard title. 
 
 Hand letters. Single letters affixed to handles and 
 used in lettering. 
 
 Head. The top of the back of the book. 
 
 Headband. A silk or cotton band attached to the 
 head of the book to strengthen it, improve its appearance, 
 and make the back even in thickness with the boards. 
 
 Head cap. Fold of leather over the headband. 
 
 Heel-ball. Shoemaker's preparation of wax used for 
 taking rubbings of the backs of books. 
 
 Holeing. Piercing the boards with an awl so that 
 bands can be laced-in. 
 
 Hollow back. See Loose back. 
 
 Imperfections. In commercial binderies, sheets re- 
 jected because imperfect. 
 
 In boards, i. Term used when books are cut after 
 boards have been attached. 2. Style of binding which 
 has a very narrow cloth back and paper covered sides. 
 
 In print. Obtainable from the publishers. 
 
 India-rubbered. When the backs of books consisting 
 of single leaves are covered with a solution of india
 
 APPENDIX 235 
 
 rubber instead of being sewed they are said to be India- 
 rubbered. Not practicable for permanent bindings. 
 
 Inlaid. The cover of a book bound in leather in 
 which leather of a different kind or color has been inlaid. 
 
 In quires. Unbound books in sheets. 
 
 Inset. A folded sheet laid inside of another. 
 
 In sheets. A book is said to be in sheets before it 
 has been bound, whether the sheets are folded or not. 
 
 Inside margin. The border made by the turned-in 
 leather on the inside face of the boards. 
 
 Inside tins. Sheets of tin sometimes placed in books 
 which are to receive heavy pressure. 
 
 Jansen style. A style of decoration in which the 
 book is absolutely plain on the outside except for letter- 
 ing. The inside covers, however, may be elaborately 
 decorated. 
 
 Joints. The part of the book which bends when the 
 book is opened. See also Grooves; French joint. 
 
 Kettlestitch. The stitch made at the head and tail 
 of the book fastening a signature at these points to the 
 preceding signature. 
 
 Keys. Small metal objects which fasten the bands to 
 *he under side of the sewing bench. 
 
 Kip calf. Made from the skin of a heifer. Stronger 
 han calfskin. 
 
 Knocking-down iron. Iron plate on which books are 
 >laced when it is necessary to hammer down the ends of 
 ',aced-in bands to prevent them from showing. 
 
 Label. A piece of paper or leather affixed to the 
 Sack of a book on which to letter information. 
 
 Lacing-in. Process of attaching the ends of bands to 
 cards through holes made with an awl. See page 42. 
 
 Large-paper edition. Copies of a book printed on 
 iaper with wide margins. 
 
 Laying press. See Lying press. 
 
 Law sheep. Uncolored sheepskin. So-called because
 
 236 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 at one time it was generally used on law books. See 
 page 65. 
 
 Lay cords. The bands when stretched on the sewing 
 bench ready for the signatures. 
 
 Leatherette. Imitation leather, generally made of 
 cloth. 
 
 Lettering block. A dummy book made of wood on 
 which leather labels that are to be lettered are placed for 
 greater ease in gilding. 
 
 Lettering box. That part of the pallet in which type 
 is screwed up before lettering. 
 
 Limp leather. Books bound in full leather without 
 stiff boards are said to be bound in limp leather. 
 
 Lining papers. See End papers. 
 
 Loose back. Books are loose backed when the cover- 
 ing material is not glued to the "back, but springs out 
 when the* book is^ opened. Called "hollow back" in 
 England. 
 
 Lying press. The under side of the cutting press 
 used in backing. Sometimes called laying press. 
 
 Magazine binder. See Binder. 
 
 Maloli style. Decoration formed of shields or medal- 
 lions with scroll work running through them. 
 
 Marbled calf. Calfskin treated with acid so that it 
 resembles marble. 
 
 Marbling. Process of staining the paper or the edges 
 of books with colors irregularly combined, similar to the 
 irregular colorings and markings in marble. 
 
 Marker. Piece of ribbon fastened to the headband 
 and used as a book mark. Also called Register. 
 
 Marking-up. Marking the position of the cords on 
 the back. 
 
 Millboard. See Boards. 
 
 Millboard machine. Used for cutting and squaring 
 boards. 
 
 Mitred. Term indicating that lines in finishing meet- 
 ing each other at right angles, continue but do not over- 
 run each other.
 
 APPENDIX 237 
 
 Mosaic binding. A leather binding ornamented by 
 designs made of inlaid pieces of leather or other material 
 of different colors. 
 
 Mottled calf. Light brown calf treated with acid to 
 give it a mottled appearance. 
 
 Mull. See Super. 
 
 Octavo. Book printed on paper folded into eight 
 leaves. Usually written 8vo. Loosely used to indicate 
 that the size of a book is between eight and ten inches 
 in height. 
 
 Off and on. Term used in machine sewing, meaning 
 that certain stitches in each signature are skipped. 
 
 Off-set. Marks made on opposite page because the 
 printer's ink had not become thoroughly dry. In case 
 of illustrations tissue paper is frequently inserted to 
 prevent this. Also called set-off. 
 
 Opened edges. See Edges opened. 
 
 Out of boards. A book trimmed before the boards 
 have been fastened to it. 
 
 Out of print. Not obtainable from the publishers. 
 
 Overcasting. Process of sewing single leaves over 
 and over. Also called whipstitching. See page 23. 
 
 Pallet. A tool used in lettering having an adjustable 
 box for holding type securely, with a handle attached. 
 
 Panel, i. Space between raised bands, or between 
 stamped lines on the back. 2. A square or rectangular 
 space on the side of a book, whether sunken or enclosed 
 by beveled edges or gilded lines. 
 
 Papering-up. Covering the leaves of a book, espe- 
 cially if it has gilded edges, to protect it during further 
 processes. 
 
 Parchment. A material similar to vellum, but not so 
 thick. 
 
 Paring. Process of thinning the edges of leather 
 with a sharp knife, so that there will not be a rough edge 
 when it is on the book. Sometimes called skiving. 
 
 Pastewash. Paste diluted with water. 
 
 17
 
 238 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 Pasting-down. Operation of pasting end papers to 
 the boards. 
 
 Payne, Roger. Style of decoration distinguished by 
 gold-tooled corner pieces and by the grace and freedom 
 of ornamentation. 
 
 Pebble-grained. Covering material grained in an 
 irregular manner. 
 
 Pegamoid. An imitation leather made in England. 
 
 Perforating machine. A machine which punches holes 
 in sections so that they can be more easily overcast. 
 
 Petits fers. Small hand tools used in finishing, as 
 distinguished from the stamps or blocks used in a press. 
 
 Pieced. Any space on the cover of a book which has 
 a piece of another material attached to it. Most often 
 used to mean leather which is used as labels for titles; 
 also called titled. 
 
 Plate, i. Illustration printed from a plate. The term 
 is often used incorrectly for wood cuts. 2. In library 
 usage any full-page illustration not paged-in. 
 
 Plough. A tool used for trimming books. 
 
 Pluviusin. An imitation leather made in England. 
 
 Pocket. An envelope made of paper or cardboard 
 generally attached to the inside of the back cover and 
 used to hold loose maps or plates. See also Book pocket. 
 
 Pointille style. A form of decoration in which the 
 design is marked with small dots or points. 
 
 Points. Holes made in sheets during the process of 
 printing which serve as guides in registering and folding. 
 
 Polisher. A steel tool used to give a gloss to leather 
 after finishing. 
 
 Portfolio. A case made for holding loose plates or 
 maps. 
 
 Powder, Sem6. A form of decoration in which a 
 small figure is repeated regularly. 
 
 Preliminary matter. Half title, title, table of con- 
 tents and preface, and all other matter preceding the main 
 part of the book.
 
 APPENDIX 239 
 
 Press pin. An iron bar used to turn the screws of 
 standing presses. 
 
 Presses. For various kinds see Lying press; Cutting 
 press; Finishing press; Blocking press. 
 
 Pressing boards. Wooden boards placed between 
 books in the standing press. Brass strips which project 
 over the edges of the board fit into the grooves of the 
 joint. 
 
 Pressing plates. Japanned or nickeled plates, which, 
 when placed next to leather bindings under heavy pres- 
 sure give them a finish. 
 
 Pulled. A book taken from its cover and the signa- 
 tures separated is said to be pulled. 
 
 Puppy. The specially prepared rubber used to remove 
 superfluous gold leaf from a book is sometimes called the 
 puppy. 
 
 Quarto. A book printed on paper folded into four 
 leaves (eight pages). Generally written 4to. Loosely 
 applied to books between ten and fifteen inches high. 
 
 Quire. Twenty-four sheets. 
 
 Raised bands. See Bands. 
 
 Re-casing. Replacing a book in its original cover, 
 either with or without resewing. 
 
 Recto. Right hand page of an open book. 
 
 Register, i. Ribbon attached to a book to be used 
 as a book mark. 2. Term indicating that the print on 
 the verso falls exactly over that on the recto. 
 
 Rexine. An imitation leather made in England. 
 
 Roll. Finishing tool with brass wheel having a design 
 on the circumference. Used in decorating leather bound 
 books. 
 
 Rolled edges. See Edges rolled. 
 
 Rolling machine. Used in publisher's binding to 
 press the leaves firmly together. 
 
 Roulette border. Border design made with a roll. 
 
 Rounding hammer. Heavy hammer used in rounding. 
 
 Roundlet. Small circle in gold used in decorating 
 books.
 
 240 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 Roxburgh binding. Plain leather backed book, letter- 
 ing near the top enclosed in gold lines, gilt top, and 
 cloth or paper sides. 
 
 Rub-off, or Rubbing. A copy of the back of a book 
 showing exact lettering. Made by placing a sheet of thin 
 strong paper on the back and rubbing it with a piece of 
 heel-ball until all lettering is fully outlined. 
 
 Run-up. The back of a book with a fillet from head 
 to tail not mitred at the bands is said to be run-up. 
 
 Running title. Short title of a book or chapter 
 appearing at the head of the page throughout the book or 
 chapter. 
 
 Saddle stitching. A machine process which either 
 sews or staples pamphlets of one signature. 
 
 Sawing-in. Sawing the back of a book to make 
 grooves in which the bands will rest when the book is 
 sewed. 
 
 Section. See Signature. 
 
 Seme. See Powder. 
 
 Set-off. See Off-set. 
 
 Setting the headband. Adjusting the leather so that 
 it covers the headband with a kind of cap. 
 
 Sewer. The person who sews the signatures to- 
 gether on a sewing bench to form a book. 
 
 Sewing bench. A board about two feet long having 
 at each end on the front edge an upright. These are 
 connected by a bar which is adjustable in height and 
 between which and the board are stretched the bands 
 or tapes on which the book is sewed. 
 
 Sextodecimo. See Sixteenmo. 
 
 Shears. See Board shears. 
 
 Sheets in. See In sheets. 
 
 Signature, i. The letter or figure on the first page 
 of each folded sheet to ensure its proper place in the 
 book when bound. 2. The folded sheet itself. Often 
 called section. 
 
 Sixteenmo. A book printed on sheets folded into 
 sixteen leaves. Generally written :6mo.
 
 APPENDIX 241 
 
 Size. A preparation used in gilding and finishing. 
 
 Skiving. See Paring. 
 
 Slips. The pieces of bands or tapes projecting be- 
 yond the book after it is sewed. 
 
 Smooth calf. Plain, undecorated calf. 
 
 Split boards, i. Boards split at the edge to admit 
 slips and backlining. 2. Boards made of two boards 
 glued together, leaving a space for insertion of slips and 
 backlining. 
 
 Sprinkled calf. Calf treated with acid so that it looks 
 as if it had been sprinkled with dye. 
 
 Sprinkled edges. Edges which have been colored by 
 shaking or spraying coloring matter on them. 
 
 Squares. The parts of the board projecting beyond 
 the edges of the leaves of the book. 
 
 Stabbing, i. Process of fastening together the signa- 
 tures of a pamphlet with wire. 2. Piercing the boards 
 for lacing-in. 
 
 Stabbed. A pamphlet is said to be stabbed when the 
 signatures are held together by wire staples driven in 
 vertically near the back and clinched on the other side. 
 
 Stamping press. See Blocking press. 
 
 Stamps. Blocks or dies used to impress designs upon 
 leather. 
 
 Standing press. A large fixed press capable of hold- 
 ing many books. 
 
 Start. Sections which after cutting project beyond 
 the others, are said to have started. 
 
 Steamboating. Cutting a number of books at the 
 same time. 
 
 Stitching. Process of sewing signatures lengthwise 
 with a sewing machine. See also Saddle stitching. 
 
 Strawboard. Very soft paper board easily broken 
 or cut. Sometimes used in cheap work. 
 
 Super. A thin, coarsely woven cotton cloth used for 
 backlining. Called mull in England. 
 
 Tacky. Glue that is still sticky but not wet is tacky. 
 
 Tail. The bottom of the back of the book.
 
 242 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 Tar board. See Boards. 
 
 Thirty-twomo. A book printed on sheets folded into 
 thirty-two leaves. Written 321110. 
 
 Three-quarters bound. See Half-bound. 
 
 Thrown out. Folded maps or diagrams which arc 
 likely to be used a great deal can be mounted on cloth 
 guards the width of the book. When opened they will 
 be entirely outside the book and are said to be thrown 
 out. 
 
 Tight back. A book on which the covering material 
 is glued to the back. See page 44. 
 
 Title. Space between the bands upon which the title 
 is lettered. 
 
 Title skiver. Very thin skiver used as labels on which 
 to gild lettering. 
 
 Titled. See Pieced. 
 
 Tooling. The decoration of leather made by stamp- 
 ing designs in gold leaf upon it. 
 
 Tools. Brass stamps used in tooling. 
 
 Top gilt. Indicates that only the top edge of the 
 book is gilded. 
 
 Tree calf. Imitation of the trunk and branches of a 
 tree made with acid on the sides of a book bound in full 
 calf. 
 
 Trimmed, i. Books which have only the edges of 
 projecting leaves, not the folds, cut off are said to be 
 trimmed. 2. In library binding the term generally means 
 that all edges have been trimmed even. 
 
 Trindle. A small tool used to take out the round of 
 a book when it is being cut. 
 
 Tub. Stand supporting the lying press. Formerly a 
 tub used to catch the paper cut from the edges. 
 
 Turning up. When books are cut in boards it is 
 necessary to take the round out of the back. The process 
 is assisted by the use of trindles and is called turning up. 
 
 Twelvemo. See Duodecimo.
 
 APPENDIX 243 
 
 Twenty-fourmo. A book having twenty-four leaves 
 to a sheet. 
 
 Two on. See page 23. 
 
 Tying up. When leather covers are put on over 
 raised bands it is necessary to tie them with twine so 
 that the leather will stick to the sides of the bands. 
 
 Uncut. See Edges uncut. 
 
 Unopened. When the folds of signatures have not 
 been cut the book is unopened. 
 
 Varnish. Bookbinder's varnish is used to give a gloss 
 to leather. It is claimed that it acts as a preservative 
 also. 
 
 Verso. Left hand page of an open book. 
 
 Warp. The threads running lengthwise in cloth. 
 
 Waste papers. The part of the end papers or fly 
 leaves which in some kinds of work are removed when 
 the end paper is pasted to the cover. The terms end 
 papers, fly leaves and waste papers are used in different 
 binderies with much the same meaning. 
 
 Waterproof sheets. Sheets of waterproof cardboard 
 sometimes laid in or between books when pressing. 
 
 Weft. The threads running crosswise in cloth. Also 
 called woof, and filling. 
 
 Whipping, or whipstitching. See Overcasting. 
 
 Whole bound. Term indicating that a book is bound 
 in full leather. See also Full bound. 
 
 Wire sewing. Sewing the signatures of a book to 
 cloth by means of wire staples driven through their 
 centers. 
 
 Wired. Pamphlets held together by wire staples 
 driven through and clinched near the back edge, are said 
 to be wired. 
 
 Witness. The leaves of a book which show the 
 original size of the sheet, although other sheets have 
 been trimmed, are a witness to the fact that the book has 
 not been cut down. 
 
 Woof. See Weft.
 
 INDEX 
 
 Acid-free leather, 58, 90 
 
 Acids used in dyeing, effects, 57 
 
 Adhesiyes, 167 
 
 Advertisements, when to bind, 135 
 
 Age of animals, effect on leather, 
 
 S3 
 
 Aldine vellum, 76 
 A. L. A. Committee on Binding, 1 1 
 . Specifications for reinforced 
 
 books, 109 
 American russia, 65 
 Ammonia, 171 
 Angora goatskin, 69 
 Arrangement for binding, 132 
 Art canvas, 76 
 
 vellum, 76 
 
 Artistic binding, 7 
 Back-lining, 34 
 Backing, 33 
 
 Backs, loose, mending, 181 
 
 , tight, mending, 181 
 
 , tight and loose, 44 
 
 Bands, 19 
 
 frayed, 32 
 
 , number necessary, 18, 91 
 
 , raised, 40 
 
 Barbour's thread, 85 
 Bench sewing, 10 
 Bibliography of binding, 221 
 Bids for binding, u 
 Binder, instructions for, 139 
 Binders' boards, 83 
 Binders for magazines, 109 
 
 ignorant of library binding, 9 
 
 Bindery in the library, 209 
 
 - , equipment, 213 
 Binding before purchase, 103 
 
 records, 149 
 
 routine, 157 
 
 slip, use of, 139, 140 
 
 Boards, 83 
 
 cut, 36 
 
 Bock, 70 
 
 Bone folders, 172 
 Bookbinding terms, 225 
 Books, discarding of, 131 
 
 , opening of, 122 
 
 , proper care, 122 
 
 Booksellers, oppose reinforced 
 
 books, 112 
 Brownie books, strong binding, 113 
 
 Brushes, 173 
 Buckram, 76 
 Buffing, 66 
 
 Bureau of Standards, Specifica- 
 tions for cloth, 217 
 
 , tests of cloth, 78 
 
 Burnishing, 32 
 Calfskin, 70 
 
 vs. cowhide, 53 
 
 Call number, location of, 143 
 
 numbers gilded, 39 
 
 Canton flannel for lining, 35 
 Canvas, 80 
 
 Care of books, 122 
 Case, making of, 36 
 Cased books, 38 
 Catechol group, 56 
 Cheesecloth, 170 
 
 Olivers, Cedric, binding from 
 sheets, 103 
 
 , tests of leather, 60 
 
 , test of levant morocco, 69 
 
 Classic buckram, 76 
 Cleaning cover, 177 
 
 pages. 174 
 
 Climate, effect on leather, 54 
 Cloth, 72 
 
 boards, 83 
 
 , cutting of, 36 
 
 for sides, 89 
 
 , government specifications, 79, 
 
 217 
 , grades of, 75 
 
 guards, 90 
 
 , manufacturers of, 74 
 
 , qualities of, 74 
 
 , tests of, 78 
 
 used in mending, 170 
 
 vs. leather, 122 
 
 Collation, 15, 133 
 Commercial binding, 6 
 
 binding, specifications, too 
 
 Copying press, 173 
 Corners of vellum, 72 
 
 rounded, 47 
 
 Cost of binding, 5. ". US 
 
 , records of, 152 
 
 , suggestions for reducing, 
 
 104, 119 
 
 Cotton vs. linen thread, 85 
 Covers, how cleaned, 177
 
 246 
 
 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 Covers of periodicals, when to 
 
 bind, 135 
 Cowhide, 65 
 
 for fiction and juvenile, 93 
 
 Creases, how removed, 175 
 Creasing for flexibility, 25 
 Crepeline, 170, 179 
 Crushed levant, 69 
 Cutting board. 174 
 Dampness, effect on leather, 59 
 Decay of leather, 54 
 Discarding books, 121, 131 
 Duck, 80, 90 
 
 for newspapers, 97 
 
 Dummy backs, 141 
 Durabline, 81 
 Embossing leather, 57 
 End papers, 19 
 
 papers and fly leaves pasted 
 
 together, 31 
 
 papers pasted down, 37 
 
 papers, quality, 85 
 
 English buckram, 77 
 Everyman's library, library edi- 
 tion, 112, 129 
 
 Eyelet and tape binders, 201 
 Fabrikoid, 81, 82 
 Fibre-filling preservative, 97 
 Fiction, specifications, 93 
 Finishing, 39 
 
 Flesher for back-lining, 35 
 Flexible glue, 82 
 
 sewing, 40 
 
 Fly leaves and end papers pasted 
 together, 31 
 
 leaves guarded, 17 
 
 leaves tipped on, 17 
 
 leaves, renewal, 183 
 
 Folded plates, guarded, 90 
 Folders, bone, 172 
 Forwarding, 3 1 
 
 Fox marks, how removed, 175 
 French joints, 37, 46, 91 
 Gall nuts for tanning, 55 
 Gas, effect on leather, 58 
 Gaylord binders, 206 
 Gilding, 39 
 
 tops, 33 
 
 Glaire, 195 
 Glue, 82, 169 
 , flexible, 82 
 
 pot, 173 
 
 , removed from back of 
 
 books, 15 
 Gluing, 33 
 
 for overcasting, 17 
 
 Goatskins, 68 
 
 Gold leaf, 85 
 Government cloth, 77 
 
 cloth, specifications, 217 
 
 documents, binding of, 54, 7.7 
 
 documents, materials used in 
 
 binding, 51 
 
 Graining leather, 57 
 Grease in leather, 58 
 
 spots, how removed, 177 
 
 Guarding fly leaves, 17 
 
 illustrations, 18 
 
 signatures, 17 
 
 Hair sheep, 64 
 Hayes' thread, 85 
 Headbands, 49 
 
 Heat, effect on leather, 59 
 
 Hemlock bark, 56 
 
 Home binderies, 209 
 
 Huntting, H. R., Samson-back 
 
 sewing, 113 
 Illustrations guarded, 18, 90 
 
 mounted on cloth, 91 
 
 Imitation of morocco, 64, 68 
 Imperfect books, when to bind, 
 
 133. 
 
 Imperial morocco cloth, 81, 90 
 Incomplete volumes, when to bind, 
 
 138 
 Index, where to place, 134 
 
 volumes, lettering of, 147 
 
 Ink stains, how removed, 176 
 Instructions to binder, 139 
 Jaconet, 17, 170 
 
 Jayelle water, 175 
 Joint authors, lettering, 143 
 JointSj 46 
 
 Juvenile books bound from sheets, 
 105 
 
 books, specifications, 93 
 
 Keratol, 81, 82 
 Kettlestitch, 22 
 
 , sawing for, 18 
 
 , three for overcast books, 27 
 
 Knives, 172 
 Knocking down, 16 
 Kraft paper, 171 
 
 paper for fly leaves, 17 
 
 Labeling, process. 191 
 Labels made of leather, 39 
 
 on tight-back books, 45 
 
 , removal of, 193 
 
 Labor, effects on cost of binding, 
 
 115 
 
 Lacing-in, 38, 42 
 Larch, for tanning, 56 
 Law books, specifications, 98 
 
 sheep, 65 
 
 Leather, 52 
 
 , causes of variation in, 53 
 
 corners, 48 
 
 , decay of, 54, 73 
 
 , embossed, 57 
 
 for. back-lining, 35 
 
 , imitation of, 82 
 
 , kinds of, 63 
 
 labels, 39 
 
 , mechanical qualities, 60 
 
 , preservation of, 60 
 
 vs. cloth, 122
 
 INDEX 
 
 247 
 
 Legal buckram, 80 
 Lettering, arrangement, 141 
 
 by hand. 193 
 
 , how indicated, 139 
 
 in white ink, 193 
 
 , joint authors, 143 
 
 , oversized books, 147 
 
 , pamphlets, 207 
 , periodicals, 146 
 
 , pseudonyms, 143 
 
 , thin volumes, 147. 
 
 , two books in one, 143 
 
 with type, 194 
 
 Levant morocco, 69 
 Library binderies, 209 
 
 binderies, administration, 211 
 
 binderies, cost of, 214 
 
 Library binding, 8 
 Library buckram, 80 
 Linen buckram, 77 
 
 finish cloth, 76 
 
 vs. cotton thread, 85 
 
 Loose back, 36, 44 
 
 joints, how mended, 182 
 
 leaves, inserting, 180 
 
 signatures, inserting, 181 
 
 Machine-bound books, 6 
 Magazine binders, 199 
 Making the case, 36 
 
 Manila paper, 171 
 
 paper for fly leaves, 17 
 
 Maps, repair of, 183 
 Materials, 51 
 
 for lettering, 195 
 
 for repairing, 167 
 
 Mending, 16, 178 
 
 by binder, 90 
 
 materials, 167 
 
 , rules for, 166 
 
 Mildew, how prevented, 176 
 Mill-boards, 83 
 
 Morocco, 68 
 
 , bock, 70 
 
 , imitation of, 64 
 
 , Levant, 69 
 
 , Niger, 70 
 , Persian, 70 
 
 , Turkey, 69 
 Mucilage, 169 
 
 Music, specifications for, 99 
 Newspapers, specifications, 96 
 
 , wrapped in paper, 96 
 Niger morocco, 70 
 Non-fiction, specifications, 94 
 
 Oak bark, 55, 56 
 bark to 
 
 for pigskin, 67 
 bark for sheepskin, 64 
 Onion skin, 171 
 
 Overcast books, cut before sew- 
 ing, 1 6 
 Overcasting, 23, 25 
 
 , sawing for, 19 
 
 Oversized books, lettering, 147 
 
 Pages, cleaning of, 174 
 , how mended, 178 
 
 missing, 133 
 
 Pamphlets, binding, 205 
 
 , binding single copies, 190 
 
 , lettering, 207 
 
 Panels, 142 
 
 , staining of, 39 
 
 Paper, effect of folding, 14 
 
 , effect on binding, 14 
 
 Parker, J. Gordon, on causes of 
 
 decay in leathers, 55 
 Paste, 83, 167 
 
 , poor, effect on binding, 59 
 
 Pasting down, 37 
 
 machine, loq, 174 
 
 Perforating machine, 25 
 Periodicals, arrangement of, 16, 
 
 134 
 
 , binding single copies, 190 
 
 , lettering, 146 
 
 , specifications, 94 
 
 , two volumes in one, 138 
 
 , vagaries of, 134 
 
 , when to bind incomplete, 
 
 T, 13 ? 
 
 Persian morocco, 70 
 Plates, folded, guarding, 90 
 
 , unpaged, where to place, 136 
 
 Preparing for the bindery, 125 
 Press used in mending, 173 
 Pressjng, 38 
 Pigskin,_ 67 
 Pluyiusin, 81 
 Polished buckram, 76 
 Preservation of leather, 60 
 Prices, schedule of, 118 
 Printing Investigation Committee, 
 
 ~ 
 
 Processes, 13 
 
 Pseudonyms, lettering, 143 
 Publishers' binding, 6 
 
 reinforced books, 109 
 
 reinforced books, failure of, 
 
 in 
 
 Pyrogallol group, 5 5 
 
 Questions binding assistants must 
 
 ask, 125 
 
 Raised bands, 40 
 Ratio of cost to circulation, 5 
 Reading list, 221 
 Rebacking, 36 
 Recasing instead of rebinding, 130 
 
 , process. 184 
 
 Records for large libraries, 153 
 
 of binding, 149 
 
 of previous volumes, 140, 151 
 
 Recovering, 121 
 
 , process, 185 
 
 Red rope manila, 171 
 Reference books, specifications, 98 
 Regular sewing, 19 
 Reinforced books, 108, 120
 
 248 
 
 LIBRARY BOOKBINDING 
 
 Reinforced books, specifications, 
 109 
 
 Reinforcing, process, 188 
 
 Repairing, 165 
 
 Reports, binding of, 138, 205 
 
 Reprints, bound before purchase, 
 119 
 
 , use instead of rebinding, 129 
 
 Resewed commercial books, 113 
 
 Re-siding, process, 188 
 
 Retanning, 58 
 
 Rexine, 81 
 
 Roan, 65 
 
 Rod binders, 202 
 
 Rounding, 33 
 
 Routine of binding, 157 
 
 Royal Society of Arts, investiga- 
 tion of leather, 55 
 
 Rub or rub-off, 92, 140 
 
 Russia leather, 71 
 
 Samson-back sewing, 113 
 
 Sawing, 18 
 
 Scientific books, when to rebind, 
 131 
 
 Scribner's, Charles, Sons Co., re- 
 inforced books, 109 
 
 Sealskin, 63, 71 
 
 Second-hand books, rebound be- 
 fore using, 108, 120 
 
 Selection of binder, 9 
 
 Semi-tar boards, 84 
 
 Setting the square, 36 
 
 Sewing, 19 
 
 , affected by paper, 14 
 
 bench, 20 
 
 on tapes, 30 
 
 two-on, 23 
 
 Sex of animals, effect on leather, 
 53 
 
 Shaving of skins, 5 7 
 
 Sheep-bound set of U. S. docu- 
 ments, 54 
 
 Sheepskin, 63 
 
 Sheets, binding from, 103 
 
 Shellac, 172 
 
 Shellacking of covers, 177 
 
 Signatures, guarding of, 17-18 
 
 Size, basis for prices, 89 
 
 Skiver, 65 
 
 Society of Arts, investigation of 
 leather, 55 
 
 , on preservation of leather, 
 
 62 
 
 Sound Leather Committee of the 
 Library Association, 55 
 
 Specifications, 87 
 
 , books of illustrations, 100 
 
 , commercial binding, 100 
 
 , fiction, 93 
 
 , general, 88 
 
 , juvenile, 93 
 
 , law books, 98 
 
 , music, 99 
 
 , newspapers, 96 
 
 , non-fiction, 94 
 
 , periodicals, 94 
 
 , reference books, 98 
 
 -, reinforced books, 109 
 
 Split boards, 44 
 
 cowhide, 66 
 
 sheepskins, 65 
 
 Splitting of skins, 57 
 Spring-back binders, 201 
 Sprinkling, 32 
 Squares, 36 
 
 Stained labels, 39 
 Stitching, 91 
 Strawboards, 83 
 Sulphuric acid, 57, 58 
 Sumac, ss, 56, 57 
 
 for sheepskin, 64 
 
 Sunlight, effect on leather, 58 
 Super, 35 
 
 Supplements to periodicals, 134 
 Taking apart, 15 
 Tanning materials, 55 
 Tapes, 86 
 
 , sewing on, 30 
 
 Tar boards, 84 
 
 Technical books, when to rebind, 
 131 
 
 terms, 225 
 
 Thread, 84, 171 
 
 Tides of Barnegat, reinforced, 109 
 
 Tight backs, 44 
 
 backs, mending, 181 
 
 Title page, where to place, 134 
 
 pages, vagaries of, 136 
 
 Tobacco smoke, effect on leather, 
 
 58 
 
 Tooling, 39 
 Tools for repairing, 172 
 
 used in lettering, 194 
 
 used in mending, 172 
 
 Torn leaves, mending, 178 
 Trimming, 32, 48 
 Turkey morocco, 69 
 Turwar bark, 56 
 Two-on, sewing, 23 
 
 Use determines kind of binding, 4 
 Valueless books, discarding of, 121 
 Vaseline for leathers, 61 
 Vellum, 71 
 
 corners, 48 
 
 Warp, strength of, 75 
 Water-proof cloths, 81 
 Weft, strength of, 75 
 Well-bound book, how to rt 
 
 nize, 49 
 
 Whipstitching, 24 
 White ink, when used, 193 
 Wire, Dr. G. E., on preserva 
 
 of leather, 60 
 Wool sheep, 64
 
 IS
 
 UC SOUTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY 
 
 A 000 643 984 8 
 
 DATE DUE 
 
 JUN 
 
 OCT 1 7 
 
 f . 
 
 GAYLORD 
 
 PRINTED IN U.S.A. 
 
 JNIVERSITY OF CA., RIVERSIDE LIBRARY